Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (902.22 KB, 226 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Help students (Ss) know more about English and review some main grammar points of English 6.
What Ss repare for this subject.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
Present simple tense.
Present progressive tense
Future
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, give a speech.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T greets and asks some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
<b>* Revision:</b>
T asks ss to review of the present simple tense
Ss notice.
T has ss make examples.
Ss do as T asks.
T corrects if necessary.
Ss copy down.
T has ss give the form of present progressive
tense.
Ss answer.
T has ss give examples.
Ss make sentences
T corrects
Ss copy down.
T says a situation then say about “Future”
Ss listen then copy down.
T asks questions about “going to”
Ss answer
T corrects
* T says what ss repare for this Subjects
Ss listen and remind
- Good morning. How are you today?
- What time do you get up?
- What time do you go to school?
<b>I. Revision</b>
<b>1. Present simple tense</b>
<i>a) To be</i>
I am
We/You/They are
He/She/It is
<i>b) ordinary verbs</i>
I/We/You/They +V (bare infinitive)
He/She/It + V-s/es
<b>2. Present progressive tense. </b>
I am
We/You/They are V-ing
He/She/It is
<b>3. Future: going to </b>
I am
We/You/They are going to + V
He/She/It is (bare - infinitive)
<b>II. Requirement:</b>
- Each student must have tools, a textbook ,
two notebooks ( one is used at home , the
other is used in class)
- Preparing the lesson before going to class.
Learning the new words, structures … after
a lesson.
- Have some papers to do exercises in 5
minutes.
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Use the correct form of the verbs:
1) I often (walk) ………. to school.
2) Don’t (waste) ……….. water.
3. Mr. Thanh (watch) …………..TV now.
4. We are going to (visit) ………….. Can Tho next week. (visit)
<i>The answer:</i>
<i>1. walk</i> <i>2. waste</i> <i>3. is watching</i> <i>4. visit</i>
<i>5- Homework:</i>
Review of some main grammar points of English 6 and prepare Unit 1. A1,2.
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Ss will be able to greet people, identify oneself and introduce others (review).
- Developing speaking, listening,reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>Grammar</i> : the way to greet others
<i>Vocabulary: </i>
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>- </i>Introduce oneself and greet others.
- Answer: Do you like studying English?
How do you go to school?
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T asks ss some questions about their holiday
Ss listen and answer
T introduces the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks students to look at pictures and to
describe who they are in the pictures then
guesss what they say
Ss answer
T lets ss listen to the dialogue between Ba,
Nga and Nam, Hoa once or twice.
Ss listen
T elicits new words and structures.
Ss copy down.
T guides to read.
Ss following the teacher.
<b>* Practice:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the
tape
Students listen and repeat after the tape
T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs
Ss work in pairs
T corrects ss’ mistakes
T asks some pairs to perform in front of the
class then corrects.
<b>* Pre-reading:</b>
T has ss look at the pictures then asks
Ss answer
+ How many schools are there in the picture?
+ Which school is bigger ?
T elicits new words, explains and guides to
read
Ss listen and do as T asks
- How is your summer vacation ?
- What do you often do during the summer
vacation ?
- Do you want to meet your teachers and
friends after the vacation ?
- What do you say when you meet them
again ?
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner</b>
* Notes:
- classmate (n) , explanation
- Nice to see/ meet you
- Nice to see/ meet you again
- Nice to meet you, too
- I’m in class 7A
I’m in class 7A, too. (So am I)
<b>2. Read. Then answer the questions</b>
- still (adv), explanation
- parents (n), picture
- different (adj) , give example
- unhappy (adj) , antonym (#happy)
- miss (v) , explanation
<b>* While-reading:</b>
T asks ss to listen and to read the text
Ss read the text silently
T has ss read the text aloud
Ss read the text aloud
T corrects
T has ss read the questions and answer
Ss read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs
Ss compare there answers in pairs
T has ss ask and answer before the class
Ss ask and answer, T corrects
<b>* Post-reading:</b>
- T gives correct answers
- T asks students to write the answers in their
notebooks.
T asks
Ss answre
EX: Her new school is bigger than her old school.
Comparatives:
S1 + be + short –adj + er + than + S2
<b>The answer:</b>
a. She is from Hue
b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c. No, she doesn’t have any friends in Ha Noi.
d. Her new school is bigger than her old school.
e. She is unhappy because she misses her
- Is this your new school?
- Do you have a lot of friends?
<i>4- Consolidation</i>
* Reviewing how to greet people
*Choose the best option:
- My school is ………. than her school. (small, smaller, the smallest))
- I have some friends. I don’t have ………friends. ( much, many, any)
- Hoa’s new school is big. There are ………students. (a lot of, some, much)
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the word by heart, reading the text again.Do A1, 2 pages 3, 4 (workbook)
Prepare A3, 4, 5 at pages 12, 13 in English 7
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Ss will be able to greet people different ages, practice listening and speaking following
the topic “greeting”.
- Developing speaking, listening, and writing skills.
<b>II. LANGUAGE KNOWLEDGE</b>
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - the way to greet others.
<i>* Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to greetings
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading,work in pairs, listening and ordering
the pictures.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>- </i>Two students greet each other.
- Ask and answer about Hoa. Make a sentence with <i>unhappy, miss</i>
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
T asks students some questions about
greetings.
Ss answer.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T uses the picture to introduce the dialogue
and explains about greeting in different ages.
Ss listen
T plays the tape.
Students listen to the tape and repeat.
T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.
T calls some pairs perform in font of class
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
T asks if the ss understand the phrases in the
box. T explains if necessary.
Ss answer
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to it (one
by one) and to choose the best answers.
Ss listen and complete the dialogues.
T plays the tape one more time and asks ss to
check their answers.
Ss listen to the tape and check the answers
with a partner.
- Hello, An. How are you?
<b>3. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
<b>4. Listen. Complete these dialogues.</b>
- How is everything?
- Just fine.
- Not bad.
- Pretty good.
- Me,too
The answer
a)
<i>Mr. Tan :</i> Hello, Lien. <i><b>How are you?</b></i>
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T gives correct ones.
Ss copy down.
T has ss play the roles
Ss play the roles
T corrects
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
T has ss describe the pictures
Ss answer
T elicits how to do
Ss listen
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.
Ss listen to the tape
T asks ss to look at the pictures and to listen to
the tape again to write the letters in the order
Ss listen and write the letters in the order then
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
Ss copy the answers.
<i><b>about you, </b></i>Tan?
<i>Mr. Tan :<b>Not bad,</b></i> but I’m very busy.
<i>Miss Lien:<b>Me, too.</b></i>
b)
<i>Nam:</i> Good afternoon, Nga. <i><b>How is</b></i>
<i><b>everything?</b></i>
<i>Nga:<b>Ok,</b></i> thanks. <i><b>How are you today,</b></i> Nam?
<i>Nam:<b>Just fine,</b></i> thanks.
<i>Nga:</i> I’m going to the lunch room.
Nam: Yes,<i><b> so am I.</b></i>
<b>5. Listen. Write the letters of the</b>
<b>dialogues in the order you hear</b>
<i>Answer:</i>
c – b – d – a
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Having some pairs of students ask and answer about greetings.
<i>5. Homework</i>
Do A3, 4 page 4 (workbook), Prepare section B1,2
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 1:
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- S</b>s will be able to ask for and to give personal information.
- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - the way to greet others.
<i>* Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to greetings, personal information.
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Greeting .
- Write 4 questions and 4 answers to asking the health.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T greets and asks some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks students to look at picture and
introduces the situation:
<i>- Who are they in the picture?</i>
<i> - What is the teacher doing?</i>
<i> - What are the students doing?</i>
Ss answer
T elicits new words
Ss listen and do as T asks
T guides to read and has ss read again
Ss read and T corrects
<b>* Practice:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to repeat.
Ss listen to the tape and repeat.
T asks ss to read the questions and answer
them in pairs
Ss read the questions and answer them in
pairs
T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking and
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
- family name , explanation
= surname (n) , give example
- middle name /,midl'neim/ : tên đệm (chữ lót)
(first name: tên)
<i>The answer</i>
answering the questions in front of class.
Ss: pair-work.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
<b>* Free – practice:</b>
T has ss ask for and give personal information
Ss ask and answer in pairs.
T corrects.
a. Hoa is talking to Miss Lien.
b. Hoa’s/Her family name is Pham.
c. Her middle name is Thi.
d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street.
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Complete the information yourself:
<i>5- Homework:</i>
Review of B1, - Do exercise B 1, 2 pages 5, 6 (workbook) and prepare Unit 1, B2,4
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- S</b>s will be able to ask for and to give personal information and to ask and to talk about
transportations and distances.
- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar</i> : - How far is it from … to …? How do/does +S+V…..?
<i>*Vocabulary: </i> words relating to greeting and introduction. Words relating to
transportation and distance
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
Week: 2
Period: 5
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Middle name, family name, live, street, aunt …
- Ss make question with What, Who, Where, How old
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T asks ss some questions about their holiday
Ss listen and answer
T introduces the lesson.
<b>* Pre-writing:</b>
T asks ss to list some question words.
Ss give some question words (Who, Where,
What, How)
<b>* While-reading:</b>
T asks ss to read the dialogue and to complete
the blanks with Wh-questions.
Ss read the dialogue and to complete the
blanks with Wh-questions.
<b>* Post-writing:</b>
T has ss give the answer.
Ss give the answer.
T asks ss to read the dialogue.
Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
T asks ss to complete the dialogue in their
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T has ss look at the pictures then asks.
Ss answer.
T elicits new words, explains and guides to
read.
Ss listen and do as T asks.
<b>* Practice:</b>
T asks ss to listen and practice in pairs.
Ss practice in pairs.
T has ss play the roles.
Ss play the roles to read before the class.
T corrects.
<b>* Free – practice: </b>
T has ss ask the distances of their classmates.
Ss ask and answer.
T corrects.
<b>2. Write. Complete the dialogue.</b>
<i>Answer:</i>
Who, Who, What, Where, Where, How
<b>4. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
- Where are they?
- Whereare they going to do?
- How do they go to school?
+ Notes:
- far (adj) , explanation
- kilometer (n) , give example
* How far: ( Asking about distances)
How far is it from… to …?
It’s …
Ss practice asking and answeringabout distances and means of transport.
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the word by heart, reading the text again, do exercise B3– p6 - exercise book amd,
prepare Unit 1, B 5,6
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
-Ss will be able to ask and talk about distances
- Developing speaking, listening, and writing skills.
<b>II. LANGUAGE KNOWLEDGE</b>
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - How far is it from … to …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> - Words relating to distance
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, listening,work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape and worksheets
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Play the roles the dialogue 4
Ss answer the questions:
- How does Hoa go to school?
- Where does Hoa live?
- How far is it from Hoa’s house to school?
Answer: - How do you go to school?, - Where do you live?
- How far is it from your house to school?
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
T asks students some questions.
Ss answer.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
- How do you go to school?
- How far is it from your hose to school?
<b>5. Ask and answer with a partner</b>
T draws a straight line to illustrate the distance
between 2 places then asks:
<i>How far is it from school to school?</i>
Ss answer: <i>It’s …</i>
T reviefw of <i>Meter, kilometer</i>
Ss take notes
T asks ss to practice asking and answering the
questions in pairs.
Ss work in pairs. (using pictures in the
textbook)
T gives correct ones.
Ss copy down the questions and the answer.
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
T has ss describe the pictures
Ss answer
T elicits how to do
Ss listen
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.
Ss listen to the tape
T asks ss to look at the pictures and to listen to
the tape again to write the letters in the order
Ss listen and write the letters in the order then
compare the answer with a partner.
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
Ss copy the answers.
How far is it from you house to school?
It’s …
Suggested answer:
How far is it from you house to the market?
It’s …
How far is it from you house to the movie theater?
How far is it from you house to the post
office?
It’s …
How far is it from you house to the bus stop?
It’s …
<b>6. Listen and write</b>
<i>The answer: </i>
a. School to Lan’s house: 300meters.
b. Lan’s house to post office: 700 meters.
c. School to movie theater: 3 kilometers.
d. Movie theater to post office: 2 kilometers.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Remind ss of the structure: <b>How far is it from…….to…..?</b>
Practice asking the answering about How far.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- Do exercise B4, 5 page 7 (workbook)
- Prepare unit 2, A 1,2
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 2
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- S</b>s will be able to identify numbers, to askfor and to give telephone numbers and addresses.
- Developing listening, reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> present simple tense
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> numbers.
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Answer 4 questions with: How far, then write one question and the answer
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T shows a telephone then ask some questions
Ss listen and answer.
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks students to look at the book then
identify what it is.
Ss answer
T elicits new words and how to read numbers
Ss listen and do as T asks
T guides to read and has ss read again
Ss read and T corrects
<b>* Practice:</b>
T has ss read the telephone numbers
Ss read
T corrects
T has ss work in pairs
Ss: pair-work.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
<b>* Free – practice:</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T corrects.
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
- What’s this?
- Do you have a telephone at home?
<b>1. Read.</b>
* Notes:
- Telephone directory (using real object):
- 11 = one one/ double one;
- 00 = zero zero
<i>Practice with a partner. Say the telephone </i>
<i>number for these people</i>
S1: Dao Van An
S2: 7 345 610
Read your telephong numbers.
<b>2. Listen and wirte the telephone numbers</b>
T suggests how to do
Ss listen
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.
Ss listen to the tape
T asks ss to look at the pictures and to listen to
the tape again to write the telephone numbers
Ss listen and write the telephone numbers
T has ss compare the answer in pairs
Ss compare the answer in pairs.
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
Ss copy the answers.
Answer:
a. 8 251 654 d. 8 351 793
b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041
c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Remind ss of how to read telephone number:
- Nomally: 896 234
- Especially: 8 963 322, 8 355 900
<i>5. Homework</i>
Practice reading telephone numbers, do A1, 2 – p.8, and prepare A3,4
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- S</b>s will be able to ask for and to give telephone numbers and addresses, introducing the
way to talk on the phone.
- Developing speaking, listening, reading andl less writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>*Grammar</i> : The simple future tense.
Would you like …?
<i>*Vocabulary: </i>
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening , work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
* Ss read some telephone numbers:
869 075
895 333
012 100
* Write new word: Telephone directory, 8 233 657
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T asks ss some questions
Ss listen and answer
T corrects ang introduce the lesson.
<b>* Pre- listening:</b>
T has ss guess Hoa’s telephone number.
Ss guess
<b>* While- listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks students to listen
(books closed).
Ss listen to the tape (books closed).
T asks ss if they can hear Hoa’s telephone
number and the question that Lan asks Hoa.
Ss answer
Teacher plays the tape the second time
Ss listen to the tape.
T asks some pairs of ss to practice the dialogue
in front of class.
Ss work in pairs.
Teacher explains the future tense by
explaining the meaning of the sentence: <i><b>I will</b></i>
<i><b>call you soon.</b></i>
T guides to practice.
Ss practice in group of four.
T gives worksheets, and then asks students to
work in group.
Students ask and answer, then complete the list
on page 20.
<b>* Post- listening:</b>
Teacher has ss read their collection.
Ss read.
<i>- Do you often talk with someone on the phone?</i>
<i> - Do you know the question asking for</i>
<i>telephone numbers?</i>
<i> - Do you know how to give your telephone</i>
<i>niumber to others?</i>
<b>3. Listen</b>
Notes:
- I will call you soon: <i>Khơng bao lâu nữa</i>
<i>mình sẽ gọi cho bạn</i>
<i>Follow-up activity</i>
Suggested questions:
- What’s your name?
- Where do you live?
- What’s your telephone number?
Now ask your classmates and complete the list.
EX:
NAME ADDRESS TEL NUMBERS
T corrects if neccesary.
<b>* Presentation: </b>
T points to the picture and asks some
questions
S answers.
T says: “Right. Now listen to the tape to know
more what they say on the phone. (books
closed).
Ss listen
T elicits Future smple tense
Ss copy down
<b>* Practice: </b>
T has ss listen
Ss listen and repeat after the tape (class split
in half to play 2 roles (books opened)
T has ss read then asnwer the questions
Ss read then asnwer in pairs
T has ss ask and answer
<b>* Further practice:</b>
T has ss work in pairs
Ss work in pairs
T has ss play the roles before the class
Ss play the roles T corrects
<b>4. Listen and read. Then answer the</b>
<b>questions.</b>
<i>Who are they?</i>
Phong and Tam
<i><b>“What are they doing?”</b></i>
They are talking.
* Notes:
Future simple tense:
+) S + will + V.
-) S + will not (won’t) + V
?) Will + S + V?
<i>Yes, S + will / shall</i>
<i>No, S+won’t / shan’t</i>
<i>* Would you like to see a movie?</i>
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Phong and Tam.
b. They will see a movie.
c. They will meet at 6.45.
d. They’ll meet in front of the movie theater.
<i>4- Consolidation:</i>
Make 2 sentences using future simple tense
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the word by heart, reading the text again, do exercise 5,6 and prepare
Unit 2. B 5,6
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
-Ss will be able to make an appointment on the phone.
- Developing listening and speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> The simple future tense.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> - Words relating to talking on the phone
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
<b>Playing a games</b>
T asks students some questions.
<i>- Do you sometimes go to the movie?</i>
<i>- How do you say to invite your friend to go to </i>
<i>the movies with you?</i>
<i>- Do you need to know the place to meet?</i>
<i>- How do you get there?</i>
Ss answer.
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
T suggests how to do
Ss listen
T has ss guess
Ss try to guess
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.
Ss listen to the tape
T asks compare the answer with a partner.
Ss listen thencompare the answer with a partner.
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
Ss copy down.
* <b>Presentation:</b>
T introduces the lesson then has ss listen.
Ss listen
T elicits some expressions
Ss listen and take notes
T guides to read
-ese = see -trast = start
-vomei = movie -rehatte = theater
-romtroom = tomorrow
-atel = late
<b>5.Listen. Then write the answers.</b>
Keys:
a. 8 545 545
b. a movie
c. Lan's house
d. bus
<b>6. Read. Then answer</b>
- Who is calling?:<i> Ai gọi đấy?</i>
- Can/Could I speak to……?: <i>Tôi có thể nói </i>
<i>chuyện với…..?</i>
Ss follow the teacher
<b>* Practice:</b>
T has ss listen to the dialogue
Ss listen
T gives Ss time to read the dialogue.
Ss read the dialogue to find the information
for the questions.
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
<b>* Further -practice:</b>
T asks
Ss answer.T corrects
- To be out: <i>vắng nhà.</i>
- To be back: <i>về (nhà).</i>
<i><b>Answer:</b></i>
a. Phong is calling.
b. Han is answering the phone.
c. They are talking about Lan.
d. She will be back at about six o’clock.
e. Phong will call her again after six.
- Do you often talk on the phone?
- Do you like talking o the phone?
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Future simple tense:
- He (call) …….. again ( <i>will call)</i>
- I (tell)……… her. <i>(will tell)</i>
- They (meet)………… at her house. <i>(will meet)</i>
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Learn the expressiopns , prepare B 1,2
<b>THE 1ST<sub> FIFTEEN - MINUTE TEST</sub></b>
<i>I/. Comple the passage with the words on the box. (6 m)</i>
friends up television music newspaper to work
Andrew gets (1)……..……. at seven every morning. he has a cup of coffee and takes a
train (2)……… . He usually reads the (3)………….…. on the train. . He works from
nine to five. In the evening, Andrew listen to (4) …………. .or watch (5)………..…..at home.
Sometimes he goes out with his (6) ……… .
<i>II/. Answer (4 m)</i>
1. How far is it from your house to school?
2. Do you like our school?
3. What’s your family name?
4. What’s your middle name?
ANSWER KEY:
<i>I/. Comple the passage with the words on the box. (6 m)</i>
<i>1.0 mark for each right answer</i>
1. up 2. to work 3. newspaper 4. music 5. television 6. friends.
<i>II/. answer.</i>
<i>1.0 mark for each right answer</i>
<i> (4 m) </i>students’ answers
* COMMENTS :
Week 3
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- </b>Ss will be able to identify ordinal numbers, listening and write the dates.
- Developing listening, reading and writing skill.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> present simple tense
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> ordianal numbers.
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Playing the roles A6. Answer the questions.
Make two sentences using future simple tense.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T lets ss play a game” bingo” <i>(ss write 9</i>
<i>numbers themselves, T reads and ss</i>
<i>check, if anyone has 3 numbers in any</i>
<i>column they will win)</i>
Ss listen and do as T asks
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks students to look at the book then listen
Ss look at the book then listen
T elicits how to write ordinal numbers
Ss listen and do as T asks
T guides to read and has ss read again
Ss read and T corrects
<b>* Practice:</b>
T has ss read the numbers
Ss read
T corrects
Bingo
Student’s sheet (EX)
2
3 9
5 8 1
14
6 0
<b>1. Listen and repeat.</b>
Cardinal
<b>* Free – practice:</b>
T shows some numbers and asks ss read aloud
Ss read
T corrects.
<b>*Pre-listening:</b>
T sticks a wall calendar on the board and
asks ss:
<i>“What is this? Yes. This is a wall calendar”. </i>
<i>It is a month. Which month is it?</i>
<i>How many dates are there in a month?</i>
T suggests how to do
Ss listen
<b>*While-listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape.
Ss listen to the tape
Ss listen and write the dates
T has ss compare the answer in pairs
Ss compare the answer in pairs.
T has ss listen once more time
Ss listen
<b>*Post -listening:</b>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
Ss copy the answers.
21st<sub>, 32</sub>nd<sub>, 12</sub>th<sub>, 15</sub>th<sub>, 30th</sub>
<b>2. Listen and wirte the dates.</b>
Tape transcript- -Answer:
<i>The first of July </i>
<i>The nineteenth</i>
<i>The sixth</i>
<i>The fourteenth</i>
<i>The seventeenth</i>
<i>The thirty-first</i>
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Write into the number:
- the second of July
- thirty – eighth
- fifty – third
- seventy-first
<i>5. Homework</i>
Learing numbers, how to write the dates
Prepare B 3,4
* COMMENTS :
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- S</b>s will be able to ask for and to give personal information and to know the months.
- Developing speaking, listening, reading andl less writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>*Grammar</i> : The simple present tense.
What’s your date of birth?
<i>*Vocabulary: </i>
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Wrire into the words: 12th<sub>, 30</sub>th<sub>, 22</sub>nd<sub>, 3</sub>rd<sub>, 5</sub>th
Listen and write into the dates:
The sixth
The fifteenth
The seventeenth
The thirty-first
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T asks ss some questions
Ss listen and answer
T corrects and introduces the lesson.
<b>* Pre- writing:</b>
T shows a caledar and asks
<i>What is it?</i>
<i>How many months are there in a year?</i>
Ss answer
<b>* While- writing:</b>
T has ss work individually
Ss work individually
T has ss compare the answer with a partner
Ss compare the answer
- What’s your name?
- What’s your telephone number?
- What’s your address?
<b> 3. Write the month in order from first to </b>
<b>twelfth. </b>
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
October
September
November
Week: 4
<b>* Post- writing:</b>
Teacher has ss give the answer.
Ss give the answer
T corrects if neccesary.
<b>* Pre- listening:</b>
T introduces the content of the dialogue:
“<i>We’re going to listen to a conversation </i>
<i>between Hoa and Mr. Tan. Hoa is going to </i>
<i>attend Mr. Tan’s class. Now, guess what Mr. </i>
<i>Tan is going to ask Hoa. (Name, Age, Date of </i>
<i>birth, Address,…).</i>
Ss listen to the T and guess what Mr. Tan is
going to ask Hoa.
T plays the tape.
Ss listen to the tape.
T explains some new words. and guides to read
T asks ss to list the questions Mr. Tan asks
Hoa.
Ss work in groups of two.
T plays the tape one or two more time(s).
Ss listen to the tape (book closed).
<b> * While – listening:</b>
T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. And
then answer the questions on page 25.
Ss: pair-work.
T calls some ss to ask and answer the questions
in front of class.
SS: pair-work.
T corrects ss’ answers and gives correct ones.
Ss copy the answers.
<b>* Post – listening:</b>
T asks the questions f,g,h
Ss answer. T corrects
December
<b>4. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
* Notes:
- nervous (adj) , give example
- On (prep): vào (nghĩa trong bài)
<i>*</i> What’s your date of birth?
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Hoa is 13 years old.
b. She will be 14 on her next birthday.
c. Her bitrthday is on June eighth.
d. Hoa lives with her uncle and aunt.
e. Hoa is worried because she does not have
any friends.
f. g. h. (Student’s answer).
-
<i>4- Consolidation:</i>
Ss ask and answer about name, age, date of birth, address, telephon numbers
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the word by heart, reading the text again and prepare Unit 2. B 6,7
* COMMENTS :
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
-Ss will be able to make an appointment on the phone.
- Developing listening and speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> The simple future tense.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> - Words relating to talking on the phone
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Read A4 in pairs.
- Ask and answer 4 question.
- Ask and answer the telephone numbers.
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
T asks students some questions.
Ss answer.
T corrects if necessary then introduces the
lesson
<b>*Pre-reading:</b>
T suggests how to do
Ss listen
T has ss listen to the lesson
Ss listen
T elicits new words
Ss copy down
T has ss read then answer the questions
Ss answer
<b>*While-reading:</b>
T has ss read the text again then complete the card
Ss read in individual
<b>*Post -reading:</b>
Questions:
- When is your birthday?
- Do you often hold it every year?
- Are you happy?
- Who do you often invite to your birthday
party ?
- How do you invite them ? on the phone or
send invitation cards
<b>6. Read. Then complete the card</b>
<i>- How old is Lan?</i>
<i>- When is her birthday?</i>
<i>- Where does she live?</i>
<i>- When will the party start?</i>
<i>- When will the party finish? </i>
T calls some ss to give the answers
Ss give the answers.
T gives the correct answers
T asks one student to read the text again
Oone students read
T corrects
* <b>Practice:</b>
T explains how to do
Ss listen
T has ss work in individual
Ss work in individual
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
T corrects
<i>Dear (student’s name),</i>
<i>I am having a birthday party on Sunday, </i>
<i><b>May 25.</b></i>
<i>The party will be at my house</i>
<i> at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street </i>
<i>from 5:00 to 9:00.</i>
<i>I hope you will come and join the fun.</i>
<i>Love,</i>
<i><b>Lan</b></i>
<i>Tel. 8 674 758</i>
<b>7. Think and write. Imagine you will be a </b>
<b>guest at Lan’s birthday party.</b>
Students’ answers
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
<i>Ex:</i> I will be 14 on my next birthday
I won’t be happy.
Supply the verds into the simple future tense:
a) I (be) ………..at her home at 7 o’clock. ( will be)
b) The game (start) ………… at six. (will start)
c) They (leave) …………..tomorrow. (will leave)
d) He (give) ………..his sister a present on her birthday. (will give)
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- List things in your house or in your room.
- Prepare Unit 3, A1
* COMMENTS :
………
………
Week 4
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Describe room’s homes and make a complaint and give a `complement.
- Developing listening, reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> exclamations
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> related to the topic “At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Playing the roles A6. Answer the questions.
Make two sentences using future simple tense.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks
Ss listen and answer
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks: What’s in the living room?
Ss answer: T. V set chairs, table, flowers, etc.
T asks: “What about in the kitchen?”
T says: We will listen to a dialogue between
Hoa and Lan. They are talking about rooms in
Hoa’s house. Now, listen what they say.
Ss listen to the tape.
Teacher explains some new words before
<b>* Practice:</b>
T plays the tape.
Students listen to the dialogue once or twice.
Students listen and read after the tape.
(Class split in halt to play 2 roles)
Students work in pairs (practicing the
dialogue in pairs and answering the questions
- Is your house big?
- How many rooms are there in your house?
- What are there?
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
1. * New words:
+ awful (adj)
+ comfortable (adj)
+ bright (adj)
+ tub (n)
+ amazing (adj)
+ dryer (n)
+ dishwasher (n)
* Exclamation: “What a/ an + adj + N !”
Complaints :
+ What an awful day !
Compliments :
What a bright room!
<i>Answer:</i>
a. The living room, Hoa’s (bed) room, the
bath room, and the kitchen.
b. Because it is bright and it has nice colors:
pink and white.
on page 30)
T asks ss to pay the roles befoere the class
Ss play the roles
T corrects
<b>* Free – practice:</b>
T ask ss to work in pair “ About you”
Ss ask and answer and T corrects
c. A sink, a tub, and a shower.
d. A washing machine, a dryer, a
refrigerator., a dish washer, and an electric
stove.
About you:
e. f. Students’ answers
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
T shopws some pictures of rooms and has ss make complaints and compliments
<i>5- Homework: </i>
Review of the lesson and prepare Unit 3 A 2
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Asking and talking about some things in the house.
- Making compliments and complaints by using exclamative sentences.
- Developing speaking and writing skills.
<i><b>I. Language content :</b></i>
<i>*Grammar</i> : - Preposition of place
- Exclamative sentences “What + (a/an) + adj + N
<i>*Vocabulary: </i>
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, writing, listening.speaking, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read the dialogue A 1. Answer 4 questions about the lesson
Write: awful (adj), bright (adj), tub (adj), amazing (adj)
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T make a situation - Now class. this pen is ten thousand dong
Week: 5
Ss listen and answer
T corrects and introduces the lesson.
<b>* Pre- writing:</b>
T has ss remind the structure to make a
complaint and compliment
Ss answer
T elicits new words
Ss copy down
T guides to read
Ss follow the teacher
<b>* While- writing:</b>
T has ss work individually
T has ss compare the answer with a partner
Ss compare the answer
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects
<b>* Post- writing:</b>
Teacher has ss read
Ss read
T corrects if neccesary.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
Teacher asks ss to look at the picture and
name things
Ss answer
T reminds students of some prepositions.
Ss take notes
Teacher reads the list of words (page 31) and
ss repeat
<b>* Controlled practice: </b>
T has ss work in pairs (to look at the picture,
ask answer about the things in the picture)
Ss work in pairs - Look at the picture, ask and
answer about things and places of them in the
picture.
T corrects
<b> * Further practice: </b>
T asks ss to ask and to answer about the things
in the class
Ss ask and answer and T corrects
and I have a picture. Is it beautiful?
<b>2. Write exclamations</b>
- Complaint (n) , explanation
- Compliment (n) , explanation
- expensive (adj), give example
- awful (adj), translation
- wet (adj), real object
- boring (ad), translation
* Function of “Exclamative sentences”: is to
Answer:
<i><b>a) Complaints</b></i>
(1) What an awful restaurant!
(2) What a wet day!
(3) What a boring party!
(4) What a bad movie!
<i><b>b) Compliments</b></i>
(1) What a great party!
(2) What a bright room!
(3) What an interesting movie!
<b>3. Look at the picture. Then practice with </b>
<b>a partner.</b>
<i><b>* New words:</b></i>
- sink (n) , picture
- refrigerator (n) picture
- closet (n) , picture
- stove (n) picture
* preposition:
- On, in, in front of, behind…
<i>E.g.: </i>
- What is there in the picture?
- There is a T.V
<i>4- Consolidation:</i>
- It’s a cold day – The living room is lovely – The house is beautiful
à Asks about 4 students to go the board and to write their answers.
* Pair work: Questions – Answers about things (ruler, eraser, book …) relating to
prepositions.
- Is there an eraser? - Yes, there is
- Where is it? - Its on the tables.
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the words by heart, practice writing exlamations and prepare Unit 3 B1
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
-Ss will be able to talk about occupations, to ask and to answer about occupations
- Developing listening, speaking, reading and speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> + What + do/does + S + do?
+ Where + do/does + S + work?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> - Words relating to the topic “At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Say the position of things in the class room.
- Go to the BB and write two exclamative sentences.
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
T asks students some questions.
Ss answer.
T corrects if necessary then introduces the
lesson
- What is your name?
- Are you a pupil?
- How many people are there in your family?
- What is your father’s job?
- My father/ He is a worker/ farmer
- How about your mother?
<b>*Presentation:</b>
T plays the tape.
Ss listen to the tape.
Teacher asks ss if there are difficult or new
words and explains them if there are any.
Ss copy down
T guides to read
Ss follow the teacher
<b>* Practice:</b>
T has ss listen to the dialogue
Ss listen
T has ss work in pairs
Ss work in pairs
T has ss play the roles
Ss play the roles
T corrects
T has ss read then answer the questions
Ss answer
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
T corrects
<b>*Further practice:</b>
T has ss ask and answer about their father’s job
Ss ask and answer. T corrects
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
- grow (v) picture
- cattle (n) give a list
- housework (n) picture
- housewife(n) explanation
<i>Answer:</i>
a. He is a farmer.
b. He works on his farm.
c. She is a housewife.
d. She does the housework and she helps on
the farm.
e. Yes, they are. (Because they love working
on their farm.)
f. She is 8.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Talk about Hoa’s family and your family
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- Read the dialogue, learn all new words by heard and do exercises B1 on page 15.
- Prepare B2, 3
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 5
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- -Ss will be able to talk about occupations and places of work, to ask and to answer
about occupations
- Developing listening, speaking, reading and writing skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar</i>- The simple present tense to ask and answer occupations and places of work
(review)
+ What + do/ does + S + do?
+ S + be + noun of job
+ Where + do/does + S + work?
- The simple present tense to ask and give personal information (review)
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> related to the topic “At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss go to the board and practice the dialogue about Hoa’s family ̣ (p 33)
Ss write new words: grow, cattle, housework.
Ss answer the questions: What is Hoa’s father’s job? ( a farmer)
Where does he work? ( on the farm)
What does Hoa’s mother’s job? ( a housewife)
What does she do every day? ( does the housework
and helps on the farm)
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks ss talk about their family
Ss listen and talk abouttheir family
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T plays the tape.
Ss listen to the tape/ teacher twice and
prepare to answer about Lan’s family, what
her parents do.
T explains new words and reviews the
structures.
<b>2. Read</b>
* New words:
- primary (school): explantion
- journalist (n), picture
<b>* Practice:</b>
T plays the tape.
Ss listen to the tape / teacher again.
T asks ss to practice in individual then work
pairs: ask and answer about Lan’s family.
Ss practice in individual then work in
pairs(asking and answering in pairs about
Lan’s family.
T follows then corrects
<b>* Free – practice:</b>
T ask ss to work in pair “ About you”
Ss ask and answer and T corrects
T asks ss to read B3 and prepare to match this
half – sentences.
Ss read B3 and prepare to match this half –
sentences.
T explains new words and guides how to do
exercise.
Ss do exercise
T corrects
<i>* Now practice with a partner </i>
<i>a)EX:</i>
- What do her father do?
<i>- He is a doctor.</i>
- Where do he work?
<i>- He works in a hospital.</i>
...
* <i>About you :</i>
- Where does your father work?
<i>He works in … …</i>
- What does he do?
<i>He is a …</i>
<b>3. Match these half-sentences.</b>
<i>The answer:</i>
+ A farmer works on a farm.
+ A doctor takes care of sick people
+ A journalist writes for a newspaper
+ A teacher teaches in a school
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
* Questions – Answers:
- T asks a pair of Ss to ask and to answer about occupations and places of work.
- T corrects and reviews the structure.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- Do exercise B1/ exercise book/ page 15, prepare Unit 3. B 4,5
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
-Ss will be able to talk about personal information, and future plan.
- Skills: listening, reading, very less speaking and writing.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- The simple present tense (review)
- Comparatives (review), super elatives (review)
<i>*Vocabulary: </i>
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, writing, listening, individual - work, pair – work,
goup-work.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read the dialogue A 1
Answer 4 questions about the lesson
Write: awful (adj), bright (adj), tub (adj), amazing (adj)
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up : </b>
T has ss ask and answer about personal
information
Ss ask and answer
T corrects and introduces the lesson.
<b>* Pre- listening:</b>
T asks ss about name, age, job, place of work
Student answers.
T corrects and writes this information on a
chart and put it on the board à introduce new
lesson.
<b>* While- listening:</b>
T hangs 3 charts (like those ones in textbook)
on the board.
T introduces the content of listening task and
asks Ps to prepare to fill in missing personal
information of 3 people in the tape.
T explains new words if there are.
Ss listen to the tape twice
Ss compare information in groups and pairs.
Ss listen to the tape again.
Ss last check information in groups and pairs.
<b>* Post- listening:</b>
Teacher has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects if neccesary, then has ss introduces
one of three people.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
Teacher asks ss to look at the picture then asks
Ss answer
T reminds students of some prepositions.
Ss take notes
<b>4. Listen. Complete these formsfor the</b>
<b>three people on the tape.</b>
<i>Name: </i>Tom
<i>Age: </i>26
<i>Job: </i>teacher
<i>Place to work: </i>at a high school
<i>Name: </i>Susan
<i>Age: </i>19
<i>Job: </i>journalist
<i>Place to work: </i>for a magazine
<i>Name: </i>Bill
<i>Age: </i>20
<i>Job: </i>nurse
<i>Place to work: </i>in a hospital
<b>TAPE TRANSCRIPTION</b>
<i>Tom is a teacher. He is 26 years old and </i>
<i>teaches at a high school. Susan is 19 and </i>
<i>writes for a magazine. Bill is 20 and he is a </i>
<i>nurse. He works in a hospital</i>.
<b>5. Listen and read</b>
- What is this?
Teacher reads the list of words (page 31) and
ss repeat
<b>* Practice controlled:</b>
T has ss work in pairs
T has some pairs play the roles
Ss play the roles
T corrects then has ss answer the questions.
Ss ask and answer
T corrects
Ss copy down
<b> * Further practice: </b>
T asks
Ss answer and
T corrects
- apartment (n)căn hộ( BE: flat)
- empty (n) trống (nhà chưa có ai ở)
- furnished (a): được trang bị đồ đạc, nội thât
- suitable (adj) , thich hợp
Answer:
a. The one at number 27
b. The one at number 79
c. The one at number 79
d. The one at number 27
<i>The most suitable apartment is the smallest </i>
<i>but it is the newest of the three apartments. </i>
<i>It has two bedrooms, a large, modern </i>
<i>bathroom and a kitchen.</i>
- Do you live in a house or in an apartment?
- How many rooms are there in your house?
<i>4- Consolidation:</i>
Ss talk about themselves.
<i>5- Homework</i>
Learn the words by heart, practice reading the dialogue and prepare Language focus.
………
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 3.
Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
Present simple tense, Future simple tense
Ordinal numbers
Prepositions
Adjectives
Occupations
Is there a...? / Are there any...?
Question words
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No exam
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T asks ss about Present simple tense.
Ss answer.
T asks ss to complete the paasages using the
verbs in brackets.
Ss work in groups of two.
T calls some ss to check the aniswers.
Ss give the answers in front of class.
T corrects.
T asks ss to read the list of things Nam will/
won’t do tomorrow.
Ss to read the list of things Nam will/ won’t
do tomorrow.
T explains the example.
T asks ss to write the things Nam will/ won’t
do tomorrow in groups of two.
Ss work in pairs.
T calls some ss to write the answers on the
board.
Ss write the answers on the board.
T corrects.
T asks some ss to read ordinal numbers from
T asks ss to write the correct ordinal numbers
(on the board by using a poster or in the text
book )
<b>1. Present simple tense </b>
Answer:
a) Ba <i><b>is</b></i> my friend. He <i><b>lives </b></i>in Ha Noi with
his mother, father and elder sister. His
parents <i><b>are</b></i> teachers. Ba <i><b>goes</b></i> to Quang
Trung School.
b) Lan and Nga <i><b>are</b></i> in class 7A. They <i><b>eat</b></i>
lunch together. After school, Lan <i><b>rides</b></i> her
bike home and Nga <i><b>catches</b></i> the bus.
<b>2. Future simple tense</b>
Tomorrow
<i>go post office </i>ü
<i>call Ba </i>û
<i>do homework </i>ü
<i>tidy yard </i>û
<i>see movie </i>ü
<i>watch TV </i>û
<i>meet Minh </i>û<i> </i>
<i>write grandmother </i>ü
<i>Example:</i>
He <i><b>will go</b></i> to the post office, but he <i><b>won’t </b></i>
<i><b>call</b></i> Ba
<i>He will do his homwork, but he won’t</i>
<i>tidy the yard.</i>
<i>He will see a movie, but he won’t</i>
<i>watch TV.</i>
<i>He will write to his grandmother, but</i>
<i>he won’t meet Minh.</i>
<b>3. Ordinal numbers</b>
Ss: individual work.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
T uses the pictures to rimind ss of some
prepositions.
T explains the example.
T asks ss to write sentences.
T corrects.
T reminds ss of the comparatives and
superlatives of adjectives.
T uses the picture to explain the example.
T asks ss to write the dialogues.
Ss write the dialogues.
T calls some ss to check the answers and
corrects ss’ mistakes.
T explains the example.
T asks ss to write the people’s job title.
Ss write the people’s job title.
T calls some ss to check the answers and
corrects ss’ mistakes.
- T explains the example.
Thành Cơng
Tiên Phong
Đồn Kết
Hồng Hà
Phương Đơng
Thăng Long
25
23
29
34
19
36
<i>Fifth</i> (5)
<i>Sixth</i> (6)
<i>Third</i> (3)
<i>Second </i>(2)
<i>Seventh </i>(7)
<b>First </b> (1)
<b>4. Prepositions</b>
Example: a) <i>It’s under the table</i>
b) It’s in front of the chair.
c) It’s behind the TV.
d) It’s next to the bookcase.
e) It’s on the couch.
<b>5. Adjectives</b>
Example:
A is a cheap toy.
And B is cheaper.
But C is the cheapest.
a) St1: A is a cheap toy.
St2: And B is cheaper.
But C is the cheapest.
b) St1: A is an expensive dress.
St2: And B is more expensive.
But C is the most expensive.
c. St1: A is a good student.
St2: And B is better.
But C is the best.
d. St1: A is strong.
St2: And B is stronger.
But C is the strongest.
<b>6. Occupations.</b>
a) He fights fires. He is very brave. What is
his job?
<i>He is a fireman.</i>
b) She’s a doctor.
c) She’s a teacher.
d) He is a farmer.
<b>7. Is there a...?/ Are there any...?</b>
Example:
Minh: Is there s lamp?
Hoa : Yes, there is.
- Ss practice in pairs.
- T explains the example.
- Ss practice in pairs.
Yes, there are.
b) Are there any armchairs?
No, there aren’t.
c) Is there a telephone?
No, there isn’t.
d) Are there any flowers?
Yea, there are.
<b>8. Question words</b>
What is his name?
<i>His name is Pham Trung Hung</i>.
How old will is he?
<i>He is twenty five.</i>
What is his address?
<i>His address is 34 Nguyen Bieu Street, Hai</i>
<i>Phong.</i>
What is his job?/ What does he do?/ What is
he?
<i>He is an office manager</i>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
SS introduce personal information
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Prepare a 45-minute test
Week 6
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- -Ss will be able to do exercises about present simple tense, simple future tense,
comparatives, superlatives, there ie/are, exclamation and question words.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: </i>Present simple tense, simple future tense, comparatives, superlatives, there
is /are, exclamtion and question words.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> related to the topic “Back to school, Personal information,At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Not exam
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
Playing a game : write first to tenth
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Practice:</b>
T write the exrcise 1 then has ss do it
Ss work in individual
T has ss compare the answer
Ss compare the answer
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects
Ss copy down
T suggests how to do exrcise 2
Ss work in individual
<b>1. Supply the corrects form of the verbs</b>
a) That is Hoa. She (be)………. a serious
student.
b) She slways (study) ……….hard to please
her parents.
c) She ( not, go) ……… to school late. She
(be, always) ………. on time.
d) Mai often (help) ………. her friend at school.
e) She (also, corrects) ……….. homework
for them at the moment.
f) I (send) ……..my friend this gift tomorrow.
The answer:
a) is
b) studies
c) does not go , is always
d) helps
e) is also correcting
f) will send
<b>2. Choose the best option</b>
a). ……….. a nice day! ( what, How, Where)
Week: 7
T has ss compare the answer
Ss compare the answer
T has ss give the answer
Ss copy down
T gives the questions
Ss try to answer
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
T correct
Ss write the answer
b). He is ……….in his family. (young,
younger, the youngest)
c). Mr. Binh……to work by bus. (go, goes,
to go)
d). …any books on the shelf? – Yes, there
are. (Are there, Is there, Are they)
e) Your house is ... than mine. (tall,
taller, the tallest)
f). This toy is….…than that one. (expensive,
more expensive, most expensive)
The answer:
b) the youngest
c) goes
d) Are there
e) taller
f) more expensive
<b>3. Answer:</b>
a) What do you do?
b) What is your telephone number?
c) Is there a livingroom in your house?
d) What is your date of birth?
The answer:
Students’ answer
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Talk about yourself
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Prepare for the 45 - minute test
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 3.
o <i>Listening: Listen and complete some information about Lan’s family. </i>
o <i>Reading: Read a passage about Minh’s family. Then check the statements and answer </i>
<i>the questions.</i>
o <i>Writing: Write about the dates in the way we talk.</i>
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
Present simple tense, Future simple tense
Ordinal numbers
Prepositions
Adjectives
Occupations
Is there a...? / Are there any...?
Question words
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home”
Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vân dụng Tổng
TN TL TN TL TN TL
Language
focus 10 2.5 10 2.5
Reading 2 <sub>0.5</sub> 4 <sub>2.0</sub> 6 <sub>2.5</sub>
Writing 5 <sub>2.5</sub> 10 <sub>2.5</sub>
Listening 5 <sub>2.5</sub> 5 <sub>2.5</sub>
<i><b>III. Questions</b></i>
I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS
<i> Circle the best option A, B, C or D(2.5m)</i>
1. Mai …….……in class 7B.
A. are B. am C is D.be
2. He will…………...…Ba tomorrow.
A. call B.to call C. calls D. calling
3. She will be 18 ……… her next birthday.
A. in B. on C. at D. to
4. ……….…any pens in the box? – Yes, there are.
A. Are there B. Is there C. Is it D. Are they
5. Of the three buildings, the blue one is …………..
A. the oldest B. oldest C. old D. older
6. This toy is………than that one.
A.expensive B. more expensive C most expensive D. expensiver
7. In our class, Viet is…………..student of all.
A.good B. better C the best D. gooder
8. 01/ 05 is pronounced:
A. the one of May B. First May C. May one D. the first of May
9. Which is the ninth month of the year?
A. December B. March C. January D. September
10. How ……..……. will you be on your next birthday? – I’ll be 14.
II/. READING
<i> Read the passage carefully:</i>
There are four people in Minh’s family: his father, his mother, his elder brother and him.
His father is a worker. He works in a factory. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick
people in the hospital. His elder brother is a journalist. He writes for a magazine. Minh is a
student. He is in class 7A. All the members of the family are happy together.
<i> A. Check (</i>ü<i>) the boxes. (0.5</i>
<b>True</b> <b>False</b>
1. There are five people in Minh’s family
2. Minh’s father doesn’t work in a factory.
<i> B. Answer the questions. (2.0m)</i>
1. What does Minh’s father do?g
2. Where does Minh’s mother work?
3. Is Minh’s elder brother a journalist?
4. Is Minh in class 7B?
III/. WRITING
<i> Write exclamations using the words given. (2.5m)</i>
1. beautiful / house
2. delicious / breakfast
3. interesting / books
4. old / bike
5. amazing / bathroom
<i> Listen and circle the best letter. (2.5m)</i>
1. Andrew gets up at ……….…. o’clock.
A. five B. six C. seven
2. He goes to work by ……..………..
A. train B. bus C. car
3. He works from nine to …………..
A. four B. five C. six
4. In the ………., he often listens to music or watches television at home.
A. morning B. afternoon C. evening
5. He sometimes goes out with ………...
A. his sister B. his brother C. his friends
I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
1. C 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. D 10. A
II/. READING (2.5 m)
<i> A. Check (</i>ü<i>) the boxes. (0.5.m) </i>
1. F 2. F
1. He is a worker.
2. She works in a hospital.
3. Yes, he is.
4. No, he isn’t.
III/. WRITING (2.5 m)
1. What a beautiful house!
2. What a delicious breakfast!
3. What interesting books!
4. What an old bike!
5. What an amazing bathroom!
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
1. C 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. C
<i> Tape transcription: </i>
Andrew gets up at seven every morning. He has a cup of coffee and takes a train to
work. He usually reads the newspaper on the train. He works from nine to five. In the evening,
he listens to music or watches television at home. Sometimes, he goes out with his friends.
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Help ss find the mistakes in their test and correcting the test.
Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
Present simple tense, Future simple tense
Ordinal numbers
Prepositions
Adjectives
Occupations
Is there a...? / Are there any...?
Question words
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No exam
<i>3- Correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects and explains
T reads and writes the answer and explains
Ss listen and copy down
T suggests how to write
Ss follow to the teacher
T has ss listen to the passage
Ss listen
T gives the answer
Ss copy down
I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
1. C2. B3. B4. A5. A
6. B7. C8. D9. D10. A
<i>A. Check (</i>ü<i>) the boxes. (1.m) </i>
1. F 2. F
<i>B. Answer the questions. (1.5m)</i>
1. He is a worker.
2. She works in a hospital.
3. Yes, he is.
4. No, he isn’t.
III/. WRITING (2.5 m)
1. What a beautiful house!
2. What a delicious breakfast!
3. What interesting books!
4. What an old bike!
5. What an amazing bathroom!
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
1. C 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. C
<i>Tape transcription: </i>
Andrew gets up at seven every
morning. He has a cup of coffee and takes a
train to work. He usually reads the
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Ss introduce a person who they like best.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Prepare a 45-minute test
*COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
Week 7
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Asking and answering about the time and one’s schedule.
- Developing reading and listening skill.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> Present simple tense, Wh- question (review)
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> related to the topic “At school”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Not exam
<b>Teacher’s and students’</b>
<b>activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation: </b>
T shows each picture and asks ss
to listen to the tape to know how
to say the time.
Ss listen to the tape.
T notices special way to talk
about the time.
Ss copy down
T turns on the cassette again and
asks ss to repeat.
Ss listen and repeat
T asks some ss to read the
sentences (below the pictures).
Ss read the sentences.
T asks one student: “What time
is it?” (using one of the pictures)
Student answers.
<b>* Controlled practice: </b>
T asks ss to ask and answer
+ What time is it now?
+ What time do you go to school?
à In this lesson we will learn how to ask and to answer
the time.
<b>1. Listen and repeat</b>
<i>*Notes:</i>
<i>- half=30 phút</i>
<i>- a quarter=15 phút</i>
<i>Nói giờ lẻ:</i>
- Giờ hơn: It’s + phút + <i><b>past</b></i> + giờ
- Giờ kém: It’s + phút + <i><b>to</b></i> + giờ
<i>Now practice saying the time with a partner</i>
<i>T: What time is it?</i>
<i>S: It’s seven o’clock.</i>
about the time (using the
pictures)
Ss practice in pairs.
Ss work in pairs A2 by asking
and answering about oneself
Ss change role ( to ask and
answer continuously)
Teacher changes the time in the
pictures and asks ss to practice in
pairs.
* Asks 3 pairs to practice in
pairs.
T corrects ss’ mistakes
<b>* Futher practice:</b>
T has ss ask and answer the
questions in pairs.
Ss ask and answer
T has ss ask and answer
before the class
Ss ask and answer and T corrects
<b>* Pre – listening:</b>
<i>+ Do you know what it is?</i>
<i>+ Do you know any names of</i>
<i>subjects at school?</i>
<i>* Subjects :;</i>
<i>+ math / music / history / physics</i>
<i>/ physical education.</i>
à<i> Now you will listen and fill in </i>
<i>the needed information in the </i>
<i>schedule.</i>
<b>* While – listening:</b>
T turns on the cassette once.
Ss listen to the tape.
T turns on the cassette again.
Ss listen to the tape and
complete the schedule.
<b>* Post-listening:</b>
T asks each st to fill the subject
or the time as teacher turns the
cassette and pauses after each
blank.
Ss give the answerand T corrects
T asks
- What do you have on Friday/
<b>2. Answer about you</b>
<i>Students’ answers</i>
<b>3. Listen and write. Complete the schedule.</b>
<b>Answer</b>
<b>Friday</b>
7.00 <i><b>7.50</b></i> 8.40 <i><b>9.40</b></i> 10.30
<i><b>English</b></i> Geography <i><b>Music </b></i> Physics <i><b>History</b></i>
<b>Saturday</b>
<i><b>1.00</b></i> 2.40 <i><b>3.40</b></i> 4.30
Physical
Saturday?
Ss answer
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
What time is it now?
What time do your classes finish?
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Pracice asking for and stating the time and talking about timetable.
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to ask and answer what someone
is doing, using the present progressive tense.
Developing speaking, reading and listening skill.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> present progressive tense
- What is/ are + S + doing ?
- S + is/ are + V-ing
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “At school”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Write: 10: 20, 4: 45, 3:15
Answer about you (3 sentences in A 2 )
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
<b>T </b>greets and calls some ss to write the names
of subjects on the board and tell the class
what they usually do and what time they
usually do things everyday.
Ss do as T asks.
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation: </b>
T asks ss to look at the pictures in the book and
say the name of each subject in each picture .
Ss look at the pictures and try to say
T gives examples
Ss listen and note down
T helps ss review of present progressive tense
Ss listen and note down
<b>* Controlled practice: </b>
T guides ss to work in pairs.
Ss work in pairs .
T calls some pairs to present before the class
Ss raise the hand to do
T remarks and corrects the mistakes
<b>* Futher practice:</b>
T asks one what a student is doing and what
time he/she has his/her English class.
Ss answer
<b>* Pre – listening and reading</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T introduces the next part
<b>* While – listening and reading:</b>
T turns on the cassette.
Ss listen to the tape then practice in pairs
T has ss pairs play the roles.
Ss play the roles.
T corrects.
T guides how to ask and answer questions
about the schedule.
Ss notice and copy down.
T has ss write their schedule then ask and
answer with a partner.
Ss do as T asks.
<b>* Post-listening and reading:</b>
T has ss ask and answer before the class.
Ss ask and answer.
T corrects.
<b>4. Look at the picture. Ask and answer </b>
<b>the questions.</b>
+ What subject is it in each picture ?
* Making dialogue :
Ex : What is Lan doing
She is studying Physics.
What time does Lan have her Physics class?
She has it at 8.40.
Note : <b>Present progressive tense</b>
Form : S + am/is/are + V-ing.
Use : <i>it is used to express an activity happening</i>
<i>at the point of speaking at the present</i> .
<b>5. Listen and read.</b>
+ Do you have your daily and weekly
schedule?
+ Do you uaually follow your schedule?
* Now you will listen to the dialogue
between Hoa and Thu who are talking about
their schedules and the subjects they like.
<i>* Write your schedule in your execise book.</i>
<i>Then aks and answer questions about your </i>
<i>schedule with a partner.</i>
- When do you have English?
- What time do they start?
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
<i>Write the names of the subjects in Vietnames</i>
1. Math
2. Biology
3. Physics
4. Chemistry
5. Vietnamese language & Literature
6. History
7. Geography
8. Civic Education
9. English
10. Physical Education
11. Fine Arts
12. Music
13. Technology
<b>Hoạt động thường gặp</b>
Class meeting : Họp lớp
School assemble : Tập trung toàn trường :
Elective subjects : Các môn tự chọ
<i>5. Homework</i>
Review os all knowledge in this period and prepare Unit 4. A 6
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Ss will be able to know about schools in the USA.
Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: present simple tense</i>
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Answer: - What is Hung doing?
Week: 8
- What time does Hung have his English?
- What is Hoa doing?
- What time does she have her Math?
- What’s your favorite subject?
- What do you have today? Write your schedule on Monday and Thursday.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T introduces the lesson.
* <b> Pre – reading:</b>
T has ss listen to the passage
Ss listen
T elicits new words
Ss listen then copy down
T guides to read the words
<b>* While – reading: </b>
T asks ss to read the passage and think to
choose which statements are true and which
ones are false
Ss read the passage in silence and try to
understand the content of the passage.
T asks ss to compare the choice with the partner.
Ss compare
T calls ss to say their choice
Ss raise the hand to do
T corrects
Ss copy the correct answers.
<b>* Post – reading :</b>
T has ss discuss the differences between
schools in Viet Nam and in the USA.
Ss discuss the differences between schools in
Viet Nam and in the USA.
T remarks
- What time do your class start?
- What time do they finish?
- Do you have lunch at school?
- What clothes do you have to wear to school?
<b>6. Read.</b>
<i><b>* New words:</b></i>
- be different from, translation
- school uniform, give example
- 20 minute break, translation
- school cafeteria, explanation
- snack (n) real object
- popular (adv) , translation
The answer:
a) T
b) F ( There are no lessons on Saturday)
c) F ( one break in the morning, and the
other is in the afternoon)
d) T
e) F ( The school cafeteria is open at lunch
time and also at break)
f) F ( Basket ball is one of the most popular
after school activities)
Schools in Vietnam Schools in the USA
- Classes start at 7
o’clock.
…
- Classes start at
8.30.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
A student talk about his/ her school.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 8
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Ask for and give the position of things
- Asking and answering about positions of books, newspaper … in the library
- Developing reading and listening skill.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> Prepositions of position.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to kinds of books and library equipments
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read the passage: schools in the USA
Answer true or false
Talk about your school.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks
Ss answer
- What is it? (a book)
- Do you like reading books?
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks some questions to lead the lesson
Ss nanswer
T has ss listen then elicits new words
Ss listen and copy down.
T guides to read the words
Ss listen and repeat
T has ss read again then corrects.
T gives the notes of the use of prepositions of
position.
Ss takes notes in their notebooks:
<b>* Controlled practice: </b>
T turns the cassette again and asks ss to read
then answer the questions.
Ss read then answer the questions
T has ss ask and answer.
Ss ask and answer.
T corrects
<b>* Further – practice:</b>
T asks a pupil: “where is Minh’s seat?”
Ss answer: <i>He is at the back of the class</i>.
T says: <i>you can ask the librarian where you</i>
<i>can find some books to borrow in a library.</i>
T says: <i>Last time, you knew where kinds of</i>
<i>books are put in the library (B1). Now, let</i>
<i>listen to the talk between Nga and the</i>
+ What is it in the picture?
+ Where do you often see it?
+ Does you school have a library?
+ Is it useful?
+ What do you usually do when you go to
the library?
+ Who often helps you find books at the
library?
à Now you will listen to the dialogue
between a librarian and Hoa. She is showing
the positions of newspapers and magazines
<b>1. Listen and read.</b>
<b>* </b><i><b>New words:</b></i>
<b>- </b>rack (n) picture
- shelf (n) , picture
- dictionary (n) , real object
- reader (n) , translation
- novel (n) , real object
- reference book , translation
+ On the left/ right
+ At the back
+ To open/ close at
<i>Answer:</i>
a. The magazines are on the racks (near the
science books)
b. The newspapers are on the racks (near the
history books).
c. The math and science books are on the
shelves on the left.
d. The history and geography books,
dictionaries and literature in Vietnamese are
on the shelves on the right.
e. The books in English are at the back of
the library.
f. The library opens at 7 am.
<b>2. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
Nga: Good morning.
Librarian: Good morning: Can I help you?
Nga: Yes. Where can I find the math
books, please?
<i>Librarian</i>
T turns the cassette on once.
Ss listen
T asks ss to work in pairs (the dialogue)
Ss work in pairs.
T asks some pairs of ss to act out the dialogue
in front of the class then corrects.
T guides to ask and to answer questions about
the librarary plan in B1.
Ss practice.
T corrects.
Librarian: Yes. They’re on the racks in the
middle.
Nga: Thank you very much.
Librarian: You’re welcome
<i>* Now ask and answer questions about the</i>
<i>library plan in B1</i>
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
- Ss name the books in the library.
- Remember how to say about the positions of the books in the library.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Practice reading the dialogues, learn the words by heart and prepare Unit 4. B3,
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
<b>- </b>Talk about the position of things in a library.
- Developing reading and listening skill.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Revision of Prepositions of position
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “At school”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss read the dialogue (B1) and answer these questions:
- Where are the magazines?- What books are on the left?
- What books are on the right?- Where are the newspapers?
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Pre– listening:</b>
T reminds ss of the sections of different
T hangs picture on page 48 on the board.
<b>* While-listening: </b>
T turns the cassette on and to asks ss to label
the shelves and racks for the first time.
Ss listen to the tape and label the shelves and
racks.
T turns it again and pauses the tape after each
label so that ss can do the task better.
Ss complete their exercise.
<b>* Post-listening: </b>
T turns the cassette for the third time to
correct the task by pausing the tape after each
label and asking each st to give the answer.
St gives the answer and T corrects.
<b>* Pre-reading:</b>
T asks ss to look at the pictures (p 49) and
asks them if they knew the pictures. Or: Do
you know the biggest library in the world?
Ss answer
T introduces new lesson.
Ss listen.
<b>*While – reading: </b>
T asks ss to read the text silently. Then
answer the questions below.
Ss read the text silently. The answer the
questions (pair-work).
T calls some ss to ask and answer the
questions in front of class.
SS work in pairs.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
Ss copy.
- Does our school have a library?
- Name sone kinds of kooks in the library?
<b>3. Listen</b>
<b>Where are they?</b>
<b>Answer:</b>
1. study area 2. Science+Math
4 -5. Newspapers and magazines
6-7. English
8. Librarian’s desk
<b>4. Read. Then answer</b>
- Which building is it in the picture?
- Do you know which ios the largest library
in the world ?
- Where is it ?
<i>You will read about the largest library in the</i>
<i>world. You read it and then you answer </i>
<i>some questions in yor book.</i>
New words :
- congress (n), translation
- receive (v), axplanation
- contain (v), give example
- employee (n), explanation
<i>Answer key :</i>
a) It is in Washington D.C, the capitla of
b) It has over 100 million books
c) It has 1,000 km of shelves.
d) Over 5,000 people work there
e) Because it receives copies of all
<b>* Post- reading :</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T remarks.
- Which is the largest library in Ha Noi ?
( The National Library )
- Where is it ?
( It is on Trang Tien Street )
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- Ask ss some questions about the position of shelves and racks in the library.
+ Where are science books?
à They are on the shaft on the left
+ Where are the magazines and newspaper?
à They are on the rack in the middle of the library
* Notes the use of prepositions of position.
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Practice using correct prepositions of position in speaking and writing. Prepare Unit 5 – A1
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Ask and answer about subjects in school.
- Developing reading and speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: present simple tense</i>
What’s your favorite class? (review)
What do you study in …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “Work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read B4, answer 3 questions..
Write: reader (n), reference books, novel (n), dictionary (n).
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T introduces the lesson
<i> </i><b>* Presentation:</b>
T says: <i>Now listen to the tape and give the </i>
<i>information about Mai’s studying.</i>
Ss listen
T plays the tape.
Ss listen to the tape and read (books open)
* Other new words suggested by students (ex:
Computer Science class; experiment, about …)
<b>* Practice:</b>
T asks ss to read the text again and answer
the questions in pairs and to give 5 questions
and answers about Mai.
Ss work in pairs.
T asks ss to read the questions and the
answers about Mai in the text book. (page 52)
Ss ask and answer.
T corrects.
<b>*Futher - practice:</b>
T asks ss
Ss answer then ask and answer other subjects
- How many days a week do you go to school?
- What classes do you have today?
- What time do you have English?
- What do you study in English?
<b>1. Listen and read</b>
* Notes:
<i> + Six days a week</i>
<i> + At 7 o’clock</i>
<i> + My favorite class is geography (English, </i>
<i>Physics, …)</i>
<b>Task 1</b>
- learn how to use (sth): học cách sử dụng
(cái gì)
- computer science class: giờ/buổi học tin
học.
- experiment [iks'perəmənt] : cuộc thí nghiệm
- map: bản đồ
- to be interested in + n/ v-ing : quan tâm
đến ai/ cái gì
<b>Task 2: </b><i>Now ask and answer five questions</i>
<i>about Mai</i>
A: What does Mai study in her Geography class?
B: She studies maps and learns about
different countries.
C: What is Mai’s favorite class?
D: Her favorite class is Computer Science.
<i>Ex: </i>
a. What does Mai study in her Physics?
à She does some experiments in physics.
b. Which grade is she in?à She is in grade 7
c. What does she learn at school?
à She learns about lots of different things
(or learn how to use a computer)
d. How many days a week does she go to school?
à She goes to school six days a week.
e. What does she study in Geography?
à She students maps and learn about
different countries.
- What do you study in Geography?
<i> 4. Consolidation</i>
- Students stick the correct names of subjects next to the flashcards on the board.
World events à History
Stories and poems à Literature
Plants and animals à biology
Rivers and mountain ranges à Geography
How to use a computer à Computer Science
Speak, listen, read, and write a foreign language à English
<i> 5. Homework:</i>
- Write 5 sentences about Mai, do exercise A1 (workbook/ page 27), Prepare A2 (Unit 5
Week 9
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe one’s ability at school.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> The present simple tense (review)
Which subject + do/does + S + likes best?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to kinds of books and library equipments
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss read the text (A1-p51) and answer the questions:
+ What time do classes always begin? (at seven)
+ What is Mai interested in? (Computer Science class)
+ What does she study in her Geography class? (maps and learns about different countries)
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T greets and calls some ss to answer some
questions about their studying at school
Ss raise the hand to do
.<b>* Pre- reading :</b>
T asks ss to look at the two pictures (p 52)
and says:
Ss listen
T asks ss to read the text and find out some
information: <i>Where Ba is; what his favorite</i>
<i>subject is.</i>
Ss read the text and find out the information.
T explains new words/ structures.
Ss copy down
<b>* While – reading: </b>
T has ss listen to the passage.
Ss listen.
T has ss read in silently.
Ss read in silently.
T asks ss to read the questions below the text
and answer them in groups of two.
Ss works in pairs.
T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking
and answering the questions before class.
Ss: pair-work.
T corrects
<b>* Post – reading :</b>
Work in pair, ask and answer abut yourselves
<b>2. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>
<i>This is Ba. Tell me what he is doing. (he’s </i>
<i>learning how to repair a socket board in </i>
<i>picture 1; and he’s playing the guitar in </i>
<i>picture 2)</i>
- It is his favourite subject at school and his
hobby in the free time .
<i>New words :</i>
enjoy(v)
- repair (v) =fix
- household appliances: thiết bị trong nhà
- draw(v)/ drawing(n): tranh vẽ
* Notes:
<i>- to be good at sth/doing sth</i>
<i>- Which subject + do/ does + S + like best?</i>
<i>* Answer key to the questions in the book.</i>
a) Ba likes Electronics best
b) Yes, he does. He enjoys school very
much.
c) He learns to repair household appliances
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
T reminds ss of the structure: Which subject + do/does + S + likes best?
<i>5-. Homework</i>
- Ss read part 3 – p 53, Prepare A4,5.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Practice reading the dialogues, learn the words by heart and prepare Unit 4. B 4,5
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Students know the names of other school subjects.
- Developing reading, listening and speaking skills.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Revision of Prepositions of position
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>answer then write the answer:</i>
a. What do you study in Geography/ Electronics …?
b. What are you good at?
c. What is your favorite subject?
d. What do you do in your free time?
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Pre– listening:</b>
T asks students to look at the pictures (at
page 54 – textbook)
<i>+ What are the pictures about?</i>
<i>+ Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa</i>
<i>study on Saturday morning?</i>
T explains the task to students.
Ss listen.
<b>* While– listening:</b>
T ask student to listen to the tape ( 1st<sub> time)</sub>
Listening again (2nd<sub> time)</sub>
T tells students to match the letters of the
subjects with the appropriate students in
correct orders.
T has students cross check their answers with
a partner.
Listening again (3rd<sub> time) </sub>
à T gives time for
students to check the answers.
T calls on some students to check the answers
T remarks.
- How many subjects do you study at school?
- What do you study in Literature?
<b>4. Listen. Then write the correct letters</b>
<b>next to the names</b>
<i>Answer:</i>
- Ba: d, a, c
- Hoa: c, b, e
Ex:
<b>* Post– listening:</b>
* Questions and answers (about Ba and Hoa)
Ss practice in pairs
T corrects
Ss practice in pairs (about themselves).
T corrects.
<b>* Pre-reading:</b>
T elicits the topic and teaches new words
Task 1:
T says: <i>Now skim the passage and pick out</i>
<i>the subjects mentioned in the passage. </i>
Students read the text and do task 1
Adding some subjects such as Music, Sports,
Art …
T checks the answer with the whole class.
<b>* While – reading: (</b>Task)
T says: <i>Now read the passage again and find</i>
<i>out what students study in these subjects</i>
<i>(write on the board). Compare your answers</i>
<i>in pairs.</i>
Ss write information into columns of Subjects.
Students compare their answers in pair
<b>* Post-reading:</b>
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
Teacher gives corrects answers
Ss copy down.
T asksSs answwer
b. What classes does Hoa study on Saturday
morning?
- She studies Computer Science, Physical
education, and Class activities.
Ex:
a. What classes do you study on Saturday morning?
- I study …
b. What classes do you study today?
- I study …
<b>5. Read</b>
<i><b>* Notes:</b></i>
- event (n), translation
- essay (n), explanation
Answer:
Literature – paintings
History – basketball games
Science – preposition
English – England
Which subject do you like best?
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- What do you study in …?
- What does he/ she learn in the Geography class?
- She learns about …
- He/she is good at …
- What’s your favorite subject?
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Do exercise A3 (workbook/ page 28, 29). Prepare Unit 5 B1
<b>THE SECOND 15- MINUTE TEST </b>
I/. Complete the sentences with the word in the box (7ms)
events English writing Biology
1. We……….….. how to use a computer in the Computer Science class.
2. In the ……….. class we study maps and learn about different countries.
3. In History, we study past and present …………... in Viet Nam and around the world.
4. In the language class, we study ………..
5. In literature, we study authors and ……… .
6. In ………...., we study about how things work and do experiments.
7. In ……….….., we study plants and animals.
II/. Choose the best option. (3ms)
1. What is Lan ………. now? She is studying Physics.
A. study B. studying C. studies D. studys
2. ………time does Mai have her English class? – At 1.50.
A. What B. Why C. Which D. How
3. Ba is good ………….. fixing things.
A. on B. about C. at D. with
4. Her favorite class is Geography.. She ……….Geography best.
A. likes B. plays C. studies D. learns
5. 3:45 is pronouced
A. It’s three a quarter B. It’s a quarter past four
C. It’s a quarter to three D. It’s a quarter to four
6. He ……….. math at the moment
A. is studying B. studying C. are studying D. studies.
Answer key:
I/. 7ms
1.0 mark for each right answer
1. learn 2. Geography 3. events 4. English
5. writing 6. Physics 7. Biology
II/. 3ms
0.5 mark for each right answer
1. B 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. D 6. A
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about and describe recess activities.
- Developing reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar</i>: - The present simple tense (review)
- Present progressive tense. (Review)
Week: 10
<i>* Vocabulary: </i>Words relating to the topics “ work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss read the text in part 5, page 54. Then answer the questions:
- What do we learn in the Geography class? (different countries and their people)
- What do we learn in the Physics class? (how things work)
- What do we learn in the English class? (words, verbs, pronouns)
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
T asks. Ss answer.
T introduces the lesson
<b>* Pre – reading:</b>
T asks and ss answer.
T writes S’s suggested activities on the board.
T Introduces recess activities and giving
practice in reading.
T teaches new words.
+ T has students look at the pictures.
+ T ask Ss questions such as:
Task 1:
Now skim the passage pick out the activities
at recess.
Students read the text and do task 1
(adding some activities such as: chatting,
playing games …)
T checks the answer with the whole class.
T has Ss listen to the cassette while following
the reading text.
<b>* While – reading: (</b>Task 2)
T says: <i>Now read the passage again and</i>
<i>adding more activities mentioned in the</i>
<i>passage. Compare your answers in pairs. </i>
Ss write more games into columns of games.
Ss compare their answers in pairs.
* T gives correct answers.
T explains the task to Ss (review the present
progressive tense)
T has Ss read through the model
- How many periods do you have today?
<b>1. Listen and read </b>
<i>+ After the language class at 8:30 what is</i>
<i>time for? </i>
<i>+ It’s time for recess.</i>
<i>- Now, tell me what do you usually do at</i>
<i>recess?</i>
+ Ex: Talking, eating, drinking, and
reviewing lessons …
<i>Where are the children?</i>
<i> What are they doing?</i>
<i> Do you like these games?</i>
* New words:
- chat (v), translation
- blind man’s bluff, picture
- catch (n) , explanation
- marbles (n ) , picture
T has Ss look at the picture. Elicit some activity
in the picture in pairs.
Ask and answer questions with a partner.
Ask and answer questions with partner.
T gives further practice in asking and
answering questions about recess activities.
<b>* Further – practice:</b>
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer.
T corrects
<i>Suggested answer:</i>
<i>a) What is this boy doing?</i>
<i> He’s playing catch.</i>
<i> What are these buys doing?</i>
<i> They are playing marbles.</i>
<i> What are these boys doing?</i>
<i> They are chatting.</i>
<i>….</i>
<i>b) Students’ answers</i>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Activities at recess
Present progressive tense (review)
<i> 5. Homework</i>
Practice reading the lesson , learn the new words by heart and prepare Unit 5 B 2,3
Week 10
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some names of activities at recess.
Revise the present progressive
Skill : listening and reading comprehension.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - present simple tense (review), Present progressive tense. (Review)
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read the passage B 1
Answer: - What is this boy doing?
- What are they doing?
- What do you usually at recess?
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T has ss tell some activities at recess
Ss answer
<b>* Pre- listening :</b>
T guides ss the task of listening.
Ss listen.
T asks ss to read the activities given well.
Ss do as the request.
<b>* While - listening :</b>
T plays the tape twice
Ss listen and compare the answer.
T calls ss to give their answer.
Ss raise the hand to do .
T remarks and give correct answer.
Ss copy down.
<b>* Post – listening :</b>
T asks. Ss answer
<b>* P</b>r<b>e-reading:</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T asks them some questions to lead into the
content of the passage
Ss listen and think to answer.
<b>* While - reading :</b>
T : ask ss to scan the passage to get the main
inforamation in the pasage
Ss: listen and read.
T elicits some new words from the passage.
Ss: listen and note down.
T has ss read new words in chorus then asks
them continue reading the passage and choose
the correct answer.
Ss read in silence and choose the correcct answer.
T calls ss to give their answer before the class.
Ss raise the hand to do.
<b>* Post - reading :</b>
T corrects.
T asks ss to work in group to make a list of
activities that American and Vietnamese
students do at the recess
<b>2. Listen. Match each name to an activity.</b>
<i>* You will hear the tape about Mai, Kien, </i>
<i>Lan, Ba. They are at the recess. Now you </i>
<i>listen to the tape and decide which games </i>
<i>each student plays by matching the names </i>
<i>on the left column with the activities on the </i>
<i>right one.</i>
* Answer key :
Mai – is playing catch
Kien is playing blindman’s bluff
Lan is skipping rope
Ba is playing marbles.
- What does Mai do?
…
<b>3. Read . Then answer the questions.</b>
- What do Vietnamese students often do at recess?
- Do you know what students in other
countries / in the USA often do at recess?
( Ss can say in Vietnamese)
à In oder to know exactly what American
students often do at recess. Let’s read part 3
on the page 57.
* New words :
- pen pal , explanation
- take part in (v) , translation
- energetic (a) , translation
- score (v) , give example
- earphone (n) , picture
- swap (v) , action
* The answer:
a) D
b) A
c) D
d) D
( Make a list of activities that American and
Vietnamese students often do )
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
T asks ss to write a passage about their activities at a recess.
- Ss practice eading B 3 , lean the words by heart and prapare Unit 6 A 1
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to say about the activities after school.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - The present simple tense: Describe habits or daily activities
- The present progressive: Describe activities in progress at the moment of speaking
Make suggestions or invitations:
- Let’s …
- Why don’t you …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ After school”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss read the text (B3-page 57)
Ss answer the questions:
What do the energetic students do at recess?(They often play basketball)
What activities are the same all over the world? ( Eating and talking)
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks. Ss answer.
- T writes Ss’ suggested activities on the board.
T introduces about the lesson.
<b>* Presentation :</b>
T says: <i>We will listen to the dialogue</i>
<i>between Minh and Hoa. They are talking</i>
<i>about Ba and their activities after school.</i>
<i>Check (v) the activities above if Hoa, Minh</i>
<i>and Ba also do them.</i>
* Now tell me what you usually do when
you don’t go to school
<b> Ex: </b>
+ go swimming
+ Play sports
+ Study at home
+ Play games
Ss check the list of activities while listening
and reading the dialogue.
T asks Ss if there are difficult or new words,
then explain them if there are any.
<b>* Practice: </b>
T has ss listen to the dialogues then work in pairs.
Ss listen and read after the tape.
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
T corrects
<b>* Further- Practice: </b>
T asks ss to wor in pair freely to talk about
their ativities after school.
Ss work in pait freely
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
<i>* New words: </i>
- reax (v), explanation
- cafeteria (n) , translation
+ Let’s +V…
+ Why don’t you +V…?
<i>Answer:</i>
a. She’s doing her math homework.
b. They are going to get a cold drink in the
cafeteria.
c. He’s in the music room.
d. He’s learning to play the guitar.
e. He usually meets his friends.
f. She likes playing volleyball.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Students make suggestions or invitations, using Let’s +V…/Why don’t you +V…?
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Do exercise A1 – p 33, Prepare A2
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to say about the activities after school, using
frequent adverbs
- Developing speaking , listening and writing skill.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar</i>: Present simple tense, frequent adverbs
<i>* Vocabulary:</i> words relating to after school activities.
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss practice the conversation between Minh and Hoa (page 60)
Ss answer some questions:
- What is Hoa doing? <i>She’s doing her math homework.</i>
- What are Minh and Hoa going to do? <i>They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria.</i>
- What is Ba doing? <i>He’s learning to play the guitar.</i>
- What does Minh usually do after school? <i>He usually meets his friends.</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
T asks.
Ss answer.
T introduces the lesson
<b>* Presentation:</b>
T asks ss to look at the pictures and name
them.
Ss look at the pictures and name them.
T checks ss’ answers.
T asks ss to list some more after-school
activities.
Ss list some more after-school activities.
T asks ss: What do you usually do after
school?
Ss answer.
T asks ss to tell the activities for each day of
the week.
Ss: individual work.
T notices ss the use of the adverbs of
frequency.
T calls some pairs of ss perform in front of
the class.
Ss work in pairs.
<b>* Free – practice: </b>
T asks: “<i>How often do you study in the</i>
<i>library after school?</i>
Ss answer.
T has ss practice in pairs. (Ss can use the
activities in exercise 2 – page 61 in their
speaking)
Ss practice in pairs.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
What do you do after school?
Which sports do you like playing?
<b>2. Practice with a partner.</b>
<i>a. Look at these activities. Label the </i>
<i>pictures.</i>
<i>Answer:</i>
<i>1. Reading/ Studying in the library.</i>
<i>2. Swimming in the pool.</i>
<i>3. Playing computer games.</i>
<i>4. Going to a movie.</i>
<i>5. Playing soccer.</i>
<i>6. Watching TV.</i>
<i>b. Ask and answer.</i>
Students’ answers
<i>Now ask and answer questions using</i> <i><b>“How</b></i>
<i><b>often…?”</b></i>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
* Look at the dialogue (A1) again and explain why Minh use different verb tense forms:
+ Ba is learning to play the guitar. He practices every day after school
à The present simple: habits/ daily activities.
à The present progressive: activities in progress.
* What do you say to suggest doing something?
- Learn vocabulary by heart.- Write sentences about your activities after school for each day
of week. Use adverbs of frequency.- Do exercise A2-p 33- Prepare A3,4,5
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 11
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to go on saying about outdoor activities,
- Skills : listening and reading comprehension.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - The present simple tense: Describe habits or daily activities
- Adverbs of frequency and question with “How often …?”
- The present progressive tense: Describe activities in progress at the moment of speaking.
- Let’s …: to make suggestions or invitations
- Adverbs of frequency and question with “How often …?”
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to daily activities
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Answer:
- What does Minh usually after school?
- Which sports does Hos like playing?
- How often do you study in the library after school?
Look at the pictures then write: swimming, reading, watch TV
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T shows some pictures of artwork and asks ss
to guess the activities pictured.
<b>* Pre – reading:</b>
T says: <i>Now scan the text, then remark the Ss</i>
<i>of class 7A do activities like you do or not.</i>
Ss read the text and find out activities that the
Ss of class 7A do.
T teaches the new words
<b>* While – reading:</b>
Ss read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs
Ss compare their answers in pairs.
T calls on some Ss to give their answers in
front of the class
T gives correct answers.
T checks Ss’ comprehension by asking them
some questions
<b>* Post – reading:</b>
T says: <i>You are going to hear some Ss</i>
<i>describing their school activities.</i>
<b>* Pre – listening:</b>
T explains how to do.
Ss listen
T asks Ss of there are difficult or new words,
and explains them if there are any.
Ss listen and take notes
<b>* Pre – listening:</b>
T plays the tape and asks ss to listen.
Ss listen and read after the tape
T asks them to read the information in two
columns
T plays the cassette again and asks Ss to
match each name to an activity.
- What do you like doing after school?
- Do you like collecting stamps?
<b>3. Read. Then answer</b>
<i>* New words:</i>
+ Rehearse (v) diễn tập
+ School anniversary [,ænə'və:səri]
Celebration: ngày lễ kỉ niệm của trường
+ Stamp collector’s club
+ comic ['kmik]: truyện tranh
+ orchestra ['ɔ:kəstrə] dàn nhạc giao hưởng
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Her group is rehearsing a play for the
school anniversary celebration.
b. He gets American stamps from Liz, his
c. The stamp collector’s club meets on
Wednesday afternoon.
d. Nam never plays games
+ What does Nga like doing after school?
+ What do Ba and his friends often do on
Wednesday afternoon?
( They get together and task about their stamps)
+ What does Nam often do after school?
( He often reads a library book or comics…)
<b>4. Listen. Match each name to an activity.</b>
* Notes:
+ Ex: go to the circus (using picture)
+ Tidy the room (giving example)
<i>Answer:</i>
<b>* Post – listening:</b>
T calls on some Ss to give result.
Ss give result.
T corrects.
Nam go to the school cafeteria
Ba watch a movie
Lan tidy the room
Kien rehearse a play
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
- Review the present simple tense
- To make suggestions: <i><b>Let’s + bare infinitive</b></i>
- To asks Ss to find out the words of sports and fun. (Look at the picture on page 63)
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Learn vocabulary by heart,Write some simple sentences about your activities after
school ;Learn vocabulary by heart; Prepare Unit 6. B. 1
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to go on learning some suggestion sentences,
give an invitation and how to respond.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Modal.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ After school”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting,playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Read A3., write a list of activities after school.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T leads into the lesson..
Ss listen
T uses the picture to introduce the situation of
the dialogue
<b>* Presentation :</b>
- T says: <i>We will listen to a dialogue (Hoa,</i>
<i>Ba, Lan, Nam). They are talking about their</i>
<i>activities after school. Now listen and guess</i>
<i>the activities in the dialogue by answering</i>
<i>some questions</i>
- What does Nam suggest?
- How does Lan answer?
- Does Hoa accept Lan’s offer?
T explains the structure for making, accepting
and refusing invitations.
<b>* Controlled – practice: </b>
T plays the tape.
Ss listen and read after the tape.
Ss practice the dialogue in groups of 4 and
answering the questions on page 64.
T corrects.
<b>* Further – practice: </b>
- T gives further questions
<i>* In the dialogue, Nam suggests everyone to </i>
<i>go to the movies. What expression does he </i>
<i>use?</i>
<i>Now tell me “what do you usually do after </i>
<i>school?”</i>
<i>In the last lesson you learned about </i>
<i>after-school activities. And now we continue </i>
<i>listening to and talking about these activites.</i>
<b>1. Listen. Then practice in groups of four</b>
What about + V-ing ……?
- I’m sorry. I can’t
<b>Answer;</b>
a. Nam wants to go to the movies.
b. Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies
because there aren’t any good movies on at
the moment.
c. Lan wants to listen to some music at her
house.
d. Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house
because she has too many assignments.
e. It’s Saturday.
(- What about + V-ing …?)
<i>* Hoa refuses Lan’s invitation. How does </i>
<i>she say?</i>
(- I’m sorry. I can’t …)
- Ss answer.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
* Look at the dialogue again and draw the forms from Nam’s suggestion
What about + V-ing
Let’s + bare – inf
* Follow-up: Groups of 4 Ss make similar dialogue, using Ss’ real activities.
Ex:
- A: What should we do this weekend?
- B: What about going fishing?
- C: Great! How about you. D?
- D: I’m sorry. I can’t go. I have to look after my sick sister
<i>5. Homework</i>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand some popular activities in the
USA through a survey.
- Developing speaking , listening and writing skill.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar</i>: - Present simple tense (review)
- Modals.
- Would you like to …?
<i>* Vocabulary: </i> Words relating to activities in the free time.
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, individual work, eliciting, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Ss go to the board and practice dialogue 1
Ss answer these questions:
What does Nam want to do? (go to the movie)
Why doesn’t Lan want to go to the movie? (there aren’t any good movies on at
the moment)
What does Lan want to do? (listen to music at her house)
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
T asks ss to name some activities and
organizations for teenagers they know.
Ss name some activities and organizations
for teenagers they know.
<b>* Pre-reading:</b>
<i>Can you name some activities and</i>
<i>organizations for teenagers that you know?</i>
<i>Ex: </i>(- Scouts
- Guides)
- Go shopping
- Watch TV
- Listen to music
- Go camping
- Play sports
<i>- </i>youth organization (n)
<b>2. Read and discuss.</b>
T introduces: <i>In America, Ss aged between 13</i>
<i>and 19 are called “teenager”. Now guess the</i>
<i>activities that American teenagers like to do</i>
<i>in their free time.</i>
Ss read the text and find out the activities that
American teenagers do (attend youth
organization such as “scouts and guides”)
T explains new words:
T says: “guide” means member of
organization for boys which aims to develop
character and promotes outdoor activities.
<b>* While-reading:</b>
T has ss read in individual
Ss read in individual
T asks: <i>Are there many kinds of</i>
<i>entertainment for teenagers in Vietnamese?</i>
<i>- What are they?</i>
<i>- Which of activities in the list for American</i>
<i>teenagers do you think are also popular</i>
<i>among Vietnamese teenagers?</i>
(Watch TV, listen to music, go to movies,
help old people)
<i>- What organizations are there for teenagers </i>
<i>in Vietnam?</i>
(There are organizations such as Young
Pioneers or different kinds of clubs for
children)
T gives practice in talking about leisure /’le~/
activities.
T lets Ss work in groups of 4
Ss work in group
T has ss rea their result
Ss read
<b>* Post - reading:</b>
T asks ss to make a list of top ten/ top five
most favorite leisure activities.
Ss work in groups of two.
* One or two representatives of the groups
report their list to the class.
- Scout:<i> also </i>boy scout<i> ( Hướng đạo sinh</i>
<i>nam): hội viên của tổ chức hướng đạo</i>
<i>nam( the Scouts or the Boy scouts of</i>
<i>America). Tổ chức này nhằm rèn luyện cho</i>
<i>hội viên những kỹ năng thực tiễn và xây</i>
<i>dựng nhân cách.</i>
<i>- </i>guide <i>also</i> girl guide (BE)/girl scout
(AmE): <i>hội viên của tổ chức hướng đạo nữ</i>
<i>(the girl guide association). Tổ chức này</i>
<i>nhằm rèn luyện cho hội viên những kỹ năng</i>
<i>thực tiễn và xây dựng nhân cách.</i>
- musical instrument: <i>dụng cụ âm nhạc</i>
- coin [kɔin] đồng tiền
- model: mẫu
Suggested answer:
+ Play soccer
+ Play table tennis
+ Collect stamps or coins
+ Go shopping
+ Learn to play a musical instrument
T asks Ss to talk about their ideas from the question “How do Vietnamese teenagers help
old people”
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Write sentences about your activities after school for each day of week. Use adverbs of
frequency; Do exercise A2-p 33; Prepare Unit 6. B 3
* COMMENTS :
………
………
………
………
………
Week 12
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about after school activities.
- Make invitations
- Accept or refuse invitations.
- Developing speaking and reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Present simple tense (review)
- Modals.
- Would you like to …?
- New expression: I’d love to, but …
Sorry, I can’t.
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to daily activities
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Tell the top ten most ppopular activities of American teenagers.
- write five activities that you like doing in your free time.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T writes Ss’ answers on the board
<i>Ex: - Have a party</i>
<i> Go out for dinner</i>
<i> Go to the cinema</i>
T says: <i>We are going to listen to a dialogue</i>
<i>between Nga, Lan, and Hoa. Nga invites Lan</i>
<i>and Hoa to come to her house for lunch. How</i>
<i>does she say? </i>
Ss listen
<b>* Presentation: </b>
T plays the tape once.
Ss listen.
T asks Ss of there are difficult structures or
new words, and explains them.
<i>- In the dialogue. Nga invites Lan, Hoa to</i>
<i>come to her; house for lunch. What</i>
<i>expression does she use?</i>
- Ss answer.
- T says: <i>Lan accepts, what expression does</i>
<i>she use?</i>
- Ss answer.
- T says: <i>Hoa refuses, what expression does</i>
<i>she use?</i>
- Ss answer.
Ss take notes.
T asks Ss to listen and read after the tape.
Ss to listen and read after the tape.
<b>*Practice controlled:</b>
* Pair work (practicing the dialogue in pairs,
alternating roles)
Ss work in pairs
T corrects ss’ pronunciation and gives further
questions
* Pair work (making similar dialogue)
T demonstrates the dialogue with the one student.
Ss work in pairs
T corrects
<b>* Further – practice: </b>
<i>- Now tell me what you usually do on your</i>
<i>birthday.</i>
<b>3. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
<b>Make similar dialogues</b>
* Notes:
-I’d love to, but…
- I’m sorry, I can’t.
- Wedding (using picture)
+ Would you like to …?
+ Yes, I love to.
+ I’d love to. But ……
+ Sorry, I can’t
Some pairs of ss perform in front of the class.
T corrects ss’ mistakes. this weekend?+ Students accept/ refuse.
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
- T reminds ss of the structures:
- What do you say to invite someone to do something (e.g. go to the party?)
+ Would you like to go to the party with me? - Students accept/ refuse
+ Would you like to + bare infinitive - I’d love to
+ I’d love to, but … - I’m sorry, I can’t
<i> 5. Homework</i>
- Learn vocabulary by heart
- Make a similar dialogue about making arrangement and making accepting/ refusing
invitations
- prepare Language focus 2
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present progressive tense.
- This/That, These/Those
- Time
- Vocabulary: subjects
- Adverbs of frequency.
- Let’s + V(bare infinitive)
Should we …?
Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting,playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T asks ss about the picture.
Ss answer.
T reminds ss of the present simple tense.
Ss listen
T asks ss to complete the passage.
Ss complete the passage in groups of two.
T corrects
T introduces the situation
Ss listen
T asks ss to complete the dialogue.
Ss complete the passage in groups of two.
Ss work in pairs.
T corrects.
T asks ss to complete the dialogues by writing
the correct time.
Ss complete the dialogues in pairs.
T calls some pairs of ss to perform the
dialogues in pairs.
Ss work in pairs.
T corrects.
T asks ss to name the subjects they’ve learnt.
Ss: individual work.
T asks ss to write the correct subject names
Ss write the correct subject names
T asks ss to check the answers.
Ss give the answers.
T corrects
T reminds ss of the adverbs of frequency
Ss listen
<b>1. Present progressive tense.</b>
<i>Answer: </i>
is doing/ is writing/ is reading/ is cooking/
are playing/ is kicking/ is running
<b>2. This/That, These/Those</b>
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Sorry, Mom
b. this/ That/ This
c. those/ These/ those
d. those/ these
<b>3. Time</b>
<i>Answer: </i>
b. a quarter past seven/ seven fifteen
c. half past ten/ ten thirty.
d. six forty-five/ a quarter to seven
<b>4. Vocabulary: subjects</b>
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Physical Education
b. Chemistry
c. Math
d. Geography
e. English
f. History
T asks ss to write sentences about Ba.
Ss write sentences about Ba.
T asks some ss to write the answers on the
board.
Ss write the answers on the board.
T corrects.
T reminds ss of the structures:
<i>Let’s + V(bare infinitive)</i>
<i> Should we …?</i>
<i> Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?</i>
T explains the table and asks ss to perform the
examples
T asks ss to write down possible dialogues.
Ss write down possible dialogues.
T calls some pairs of ss to perform the
dialogues before the class.
Ss work in pairs.
T corrects.
<i>Answer:</i>
Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunchtime.
Ba always practices the guitar after school.
Ba usually does her homework in the
evening.
Ba sometimes plays computer games.
<b>6. Making suggestions</b>
- Let’s + V(bare infinitive)
Should we …?
Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?
Lan: Let’s go swimming.
Hoa: OK.
Minh: Should we play table tennis?
Nam: I’m sorry, I can’t.
Ba: Would you like to play basketball?
Nga: I’d love to.
<b>Suggestions:</b>
A: Let’s play volleyball.
B: OK.
C: Would you like to watch movies?
D: I’d love to.
E: Should we play soccer?
F: I’m sorry, I can’t.
G: Would you like to come to my house?
H: I’m sorry, I can’t.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Answer:
- What time is it?
- Which classes do you have today?
- What are you doing?
<i>5. Homework</i>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present progressive tense.
- This/That, These/Those
- Time
- Vocabulary: subjects
- Adverbs of frequency.
- Let’s + V(bare infinitive)
Should we …?
Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting,playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<i>3- New lesson:</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up:</b>
T has ss play a game called “chain game”
Ss play the game (class divided into two
groups, say activities after school.
T follows and remarks
<b>* Practice:</b>
T write exercise I and has ss do it
Ss copy down and work in individual
T has ss compare the answer with a partner.
Ss compare the answer in pairs
Start with: I often listen to music,…
<b>I/. Choose the best option</b>
1. How …………. does she write to you?
(always, often, usually, never)
2. Let’s ………….. him to the party tonight?
(invite, to invite, inviting, invites)
3.Their brother ……… leave for the
USA next week. (will going to, goes to , is
going to?
T has ss give the answer.
Ss give the answer
T corrects if necessary
Ss copy down.
T write exercise II and has ss do it
Ss copy down and work in individual
T has ss compare the answer with a partner.
Ss compare the answer in pairs
T has ss give the answer.
Ss give the answer
T corrects if necessary
Ss copy down.
T asks ss to write the answer
Ss work in individual
T has ss ask and answer
Ss ask and answer
T corrects
4. What about …………..something to eat?
(we have, having, have)
5. She’ll ………….. at home in an hour.
(is, be, being)
6. Thank you ………..inviting me to your
party? (to, about, for)
7. He enjoys………..table tennis on Sunday.
(play, plays, to play, playing)
<i>The answer:</i>
<i>1. often 2. invite 3. is going to</i>
<i>4. having 5. be 6. for</i>
<i>7. playing</i>
<b>II/. Choose the word that has underlined </b>
<b>part different from the others.</b>
1. A. indoors B. marbles C. events
2. A. chat B. atlas C. relax
3. A. experiment B. bell C. essay
4. A. appliance B. amazing C. calendar
5. A. famous B. math C. equation
6. A. drawing B. author C. area
<i>The answer:</i>
<i>1. C 2. B 3. A</i>
<i>4. C 5. B 6. C</i>
<b>III/. Write the answer</b>
1. What’s your favorite subject?
2. What do you do in your free time?
3. When do you have history?
4. What do you usually after school?
5. What sports do you like playing?
<i>The answer</i>
<i>Students’ answer</i>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Write activitites after school
<i>5. Homework</i>
Prapare for a test.
* COMMENTS :
………
………
Week 13
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6.
o <i>Listening: Listen and complete the passage about the activities at recess. </i>
o <i>Reading: Read a passage about American students. Then check the statements if they </i>
<i>are True(T) or False(F).</i>
o <i>Writing: Find out the mistakes and rewrite the sentences in correct ones.</i>
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present progressive tense.
- This/That, These/Those
- Time
- Vocabulary: subjects
- Adverbs of frequency.
- Let’s + V(bare infinitive)
Should we …?
Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”
Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vân dụng Tổng
TN TL TN TL TN TL
Language 10 10
Reading 2 <sub>0.5</sub> 4 <sub>2.0</sub> 6 <sub>2.5</sub>
Writing 5 <sub>2.5</sub> 10 <sub>2.5</sub>
Listening 5
2.5
5
2.5
<i><b>III. Questions</b></i>
<b>THE 2nd<sub> FORTY-FIVE- MINUTE TEST</sub></b>
I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5m)
<i>Circle the best option A, B, C or D</i>
1. What’s your ……..…subject, Lan?
a. favorite b. popular c. famous d. like
2. In ………...…I study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world.
a. History b. Math c. Geography d. Physics
3. Mary likes reading. She often goes to the school……..……..when she has time.
a. laboratory b. library c. cafeteria d. bank
4. What time is it? – It’s 11.45.
a. It’s eleven forty-five b. It’s a quarter to twelve
c. It’s fifteen to twelve d. All a, b, c
5. Mai is very ………in computers.
a. interest b. interested c. interesting d. interestedly
6. Quang is good at……..…..….things.
a. fix b. fixing c. to fix d. fixes
7. At present, her group …………..a new play.
a. does b. is doing c. rehearses d. is rehearsing
8. How about………a school party?
a. have b. having c. to have d. has
9. They don’t play sports. They are not………...
a. sportingly b. sportive c. sporty d. sports
10. I usually go swimming. Swimming is my favorite ………….…
a. pastime b. action c. working d. game
II/. READING (2.5m)
<i>Read the passage carefully:</i>
American students take part in different activities at recess. The energetic students often
play basketball, but they never have time to play a whole game. They just practice scoring goals.
This is called “shooting some hoops”. Many of the students listen to music. They usually have
portable CD players with small earphones. Sometimes they read or study at the same time.
Some of the children, mainly boys, swap baseball cards. These pictures of baseball players come
in packets of candy. They swap cards with their friends so they can get the ones they want.
Eating and talking with friends are the most common ways of relaxing at recess. These
activities are the same all over the world.
<b>True</b> <b>False</b>
1. The energetic students often play basketball
2. Only boys swap baseball cards.
<i>B. Answer the questions. </i>
1. What do many of American students do at recess?
2. Do they read or study?
3. What do you often do at recess?
4. Do you usually play a game at resess?
III/. WRITING (2.5 m)
<i>* Rewrite the sentences:</i>
1. go / with / my / never / friends / I / at night / out.
………
2. she / shopping / go / usually / doesn’t.
………
3. at / on / 8.40 / Tuesday / has / Thu / Physics.
………
4. to / Would / play / you / like / basketball?
………
5. after school / I / the / in / library / always / study.
………
VI/. LISTENING (2.5m)<b> </b>
<i>Listen. Then complete the following passage.</i>
At twenty-five past nine, the bell rings and all the (1)……….……go into the yard. It’s
time for recess. They are all happy and excited. They meet their (2) ….……….….….and have
some fun. Many are talking about the last class, or last night’s movie. Some are (3)
………...and drinking as well as (4)…………..……. Some students are playing games
like blindman’s bluff or catch. Some boys and girls are playing (5)………….……and some
girls are skipping rope.
<i>(Tape of the text – page 56 – English 7)</i>
<i>Students: </i>
- Ss review Unit 4 to Unit 6.
- Ss redo the second English test at home
I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
<i>Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence</i>
1. a. favorite 6. b. fixing
<i>* A. 0,25 mark for each right answer</i>
1. F 2. F.
<i>* B.0,5 mark for each right answer</i>
1. Many of American students listen to music.
2. Yes, they do.
3. student’s answer
4. student’s answer
III/. WRITING (2.5 m)
1. I never go out with my friends at night.
<i>Listen. Then complete the following passage.</i>
(1) students (2) friends (3) eating (4)chatting (5)marbles
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Help ss find the mistakes in their test and correct them.
Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present progressive tense.
- This/That, These/Those
- Time
- Vocabulary: subjects
- Adverbs of frequency.
- Let’s + V(bare infinitive)
Should we …?
Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …?
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
Week: 14
<i>3- correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects and explains
T reads and writes the answer and explains
T suggests how to write
Ss follow to the teacher
T has ss listen to the passage
Ss listen
T gives the answer
Ss copy down
I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
1. a. favorite 6.b. fixing
2. c. History 7. d. is rehearsing
3. b. Library 8. b. having
4. d. All a, b, c 9. c. sporty
5. b. interested 10. a. pastime
II/. READING
<i>* A. Read the passage carefully and decide</i>
<i>if the statements are True(T) or False(F).</i>
<i>0,5m)</i>
1. F 2. F.
<i>* B. Answer(2,0 m)</i>
1. Many of American students listen to
2. Yes, they do.
3. student’s answer
4. student’s answer
III/. WRITING (2.5 m)
1. I never go out with my friends at night.
2. She doesn’t usually go shopping.
3. Thu has Physics at 8.40 on Tuesday.
4. Would you like to play basketball?
5. I always study in the library after school.
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
<i>Listen. Then complete the following</i>
<i>passage.</i>
(1) students (2) friends
(3) eating (4) chatting (5) marbles
At twenty-five past nine, the bell rings and
all the (1) <i><b>students</b></i> go into the yard. It’s time
for recess. They are all happy and excited.
They meet their (2) <i><b>friends</b></i> and have some
fun. Many are talking about the last class, or
last night’s movie. Some are (3) <i><b>eating </b></i>and
drinking as well as (4) <i><b>chatting</b></i> Some
students are playing games like blindman’s
bluff or catch. Some boys and girls are
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Ss read all parts in the test
<i>5. Homework:</i>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what a student often do at school and
after school.
- Developing speaking and reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> Future simple tense (review)
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the work and vacations
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
- Tell the top ten most ppopular activities of American teenagers.
- write five activities that you like doing in your free time.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T greets and call some ss to answer the
questions.
Ss raise the hand to do
T writes Ss’ suggested time on the board.
T says: “We will listen to a dialogue between
Hoa and her uncle. She’s talking to her uncle
about her study”.
<b>* Presentation:</b>
Students listen to the tape.
T asks Ss if there are new words/ phrases and
explains them.
<b>* Controlled practice:</b>
Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.
* Pair work (practicing the dialogue)
T asks ss to read the questions and answer them.
Ss answer the questions in groups of two.
T calls some ss to asks and answer the
+ What time do your classes start?
+ What time do they finish?
+ For how many hours a day do you work
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
<i>New words/ phrases:</i>
- last: (v) kéo dài
- to be late for sth: trễ cái gì
<i>To be late for school: </i>trễ học
- It/ That takes about….Mất khoảng..
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Hoa’s class’s start at 7 o’clock.
b. They finish at a quarter past eleven.
c. Hoa does her homework 2 hours a day.
d. She will visit her parents on their farm
Week: 14
questions before class.
Ss works in pairs.
T corrects.
during her vacation.
e, f, g. Students’ answers.
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
T asks ss to tell the class something about their work at school
<i>5. Homework</i>
- T helps Ss write three sentences about the Ss’ work, prepare A2
Week 14
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about vacations in America.
- Developing speaking, listening and reading skills.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> Future simple tense (review)
<i>* Vocabulary: </i>Words relating to the work and vacations
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Play the roles.
Answer 4 questions about Hoa.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T greets and calls some ss to tell the class
<b>* Pre – reading:</b>
Ss are asked to talk about the vacations and <b>2. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>
holidays (in Vietnam) and what they do
during the holidays.
T asks: “Who writes this letter and to whom?
Ss read the letter silently and answer the T’s
questions. Then take notes of vacations in
America, the activities of American students.
T explains new words.
Ss take notes
<b>* While-reading:</b>
T has ss read
Ss read in individual
T has ss answer
Ss answer the questions
<b>* Post – reading:</b>
* Pair work
Ss ask and answer questions about vacations
and holidays.
T corrects the answers.
Ss copy down
<b>* Pre-listening:</b>
T asks ss to identify the actions of each
picture.
Ss identify the actions of each picture.
Reviewing vocabulary:
<b>* While-listening:</b>
T has ss listen
Ss listen
T has ss compare the asnwer in pairs
Ss compare the answer in pairs
<b>* Post-listening:</b>
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects
- Easter: Lễ Phục sinh
- Thanksgiving: Lễ tạ ơn
- few à fewer
- celebrate (v)
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Summer vacation is the longest in
America.
b. During his vacation, Tim spends time
with his family.
c. Vietnamese students have fewer vacations
than American students.
<b>3. Listen. Write the name of the public</b>
<b>holiday in each of these pictures.</b>
+ Easter
+ Thanksgiving
+ Christmas
+ New Year
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Thanksgiving
b. Independence Day
<b>Tape transcription</b>
<i>Tim enjoys all the public holidays.</i>
<i>At Christmas, he always gets a lot of gifts.</i>
<i>Thanksgiving is an important celebration, and there is always turkey and lots of good food.</i>
<i>In Tim’s hometown, there is always a large fireworks display on Independence Day.</i>
và hình thỏ con (Easter Bunny). Quả trứng tượng trưng cho sự sinh sơi, tạo hóa và sự sống mới.
Thỏ mang các quả trứng được sơn nhiều màu sắc đến cho trẻ em và giấu đi cho các em tìm
kíếm, giống như ơng già Nô-el mang quà trong ngày Giáng sinh.
<i><b>Thanksgiving (Lễ tạ ơn):</b></i> được tổ chức ở Hoa Kỳ vào ngày thứ Năm của tuần thứ tư của
tháng 11. Đó là một ngày lễ trong đó mọi thành viên trong gia đình ăn một bữa ăn truyền thống
gồm có thịt gà tây, gà nhồi, xốt Cranbery, khoai lang, bánh mì bắp, rau luộc và bánh nhân bí.
<i><b>4</b><b>th</b><b><sub> of July:</sub></b></i><sub> ngày Quốc khánh Hoa Kỳ</sub>
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
- The days off in Vietnam and the USA.
<i>May Day, National/ Independence Day, Tet holiday, Thanksgiving,…</i>
Give example about comparative and superlative of adjectives
<i>5. Homework</i>
Learn the words by heart, practice reading the lesson and prepare Unit 7 A 4
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about the Ss’ work at school and at home.
- Developing reading and listening skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
* <i>Vocabulary:</i> Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No exam
<i>3- correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T leads in with some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
T asks ss to work in pair to discuss these
questions.
Ss work in pair to do.
+ What do you do every day?
+ Is your work at school hard or easy ?
+ How many hours a day do you study ?
+ Do you have to do a lot of homework ?
+ Do you like that ?
à We are going to read a passage about
Hoa – a typical grade 7 student in Viet Nam.
Week: 15
<b>* Pre – reading:</b>
T asks Ss to talk about the work.
T(Ss) show(s) some new words in the
reading.
T gives meanings of words in context
<b>* While reading:</b>
Ss read the text silently and find the information
to answer the questions in textbook.
* Pair work:
Ss ask and answer questions about the Ss’ work.
T corrects the answers.
<b>* Post – reading:</b>
T has ss make sentences with fewer , more
And we will know how she studies.
<b>4. read. Then answer the questions.</b>
* New words :
+ take a look = look at (v)
+ typical ( adj)
+ review (v)
+ definitely ( adv )
Note :
fewer …. than …… : ít hơn
more …… than ……. : nhiều hơn
à they are used to compare nouns
* Read and answer:
a) Because they only work a few hours a
day and have long vacations.
b) Hoa works 20 hours a week. It is fewer
than most workers’ work
c) ( student’s answer )
d) No, the writer doesn’t think students are
lazy.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
T reminds ss of a typical student’s work: study at school about 20 hours a week; 12
hours of homework every week; review work before test. Total: about 45 hours, more than
some workers.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
Practice reading the lesson, Prepare Unit 7 B1
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about the work of Mr. and Mrs. Jones.
- Developing listening and reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Simple tense (review)
* <i>Vocabulary: </i>
- Words relating to the work.
Week: 15
- Comparative: <i>fewer days off than…</i>
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T greets and calls some ss to tell class about
sudent’s work
Ss are asked to review the form of a letter.
Ss listen to the cassette one or two time(s) and
take notes some details about the jobs of Mr.
and Mrs. Jones.
T explains new words.
Ss copy down.
T explains and gives meaning of words in the
context.
Ss listen and take notes
<b>* While – reading:</b>
Ss are asked to read the text silently.
Ss read the text silently and find the
Ss ask and answer
T corrects the answers.
<b>* Post – reading:</b>
T has ss read the leter before the class.
Ss read.
T corrects.
<b>1. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.</b>
<i>New words:</i>
- part-time['pɑ:ttaim](adv): bán thời gian
- Homeless (adj): không nhà cửa, vô gia cư
- mechanic(n): thợ máy
- prefer(v):
- morning shift: ca sáng
* a three - week summer vacation
<i>* He has fewer days off than my mother</i>
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Mrs. Jones works at home. But three
morning a week she works part-time at a
local supermarket.
b. She (together with other women) cooks
lunch for homeless people once a week.
c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic. He repairs
machines in a factory.
d. He works about 40 hours a week.
e. The Johns family always goes to Florida
on vacation. They have a great time there.
<i>4 - Consolidation:</i>
Answer:
<i>5. Homework</i>
- T helps Ss write three sentences about the Ss’ work, prepare Unit 7 B 2,3,4
<i><b>I. Where do they work? Circle the correct answer for each of the following sentences. (3m)</b></i>
1. Mr. Nam is a farmer. He works on a…
a. hospital b. school c. post office d. farm
2. Mrs. Nga is a doctor. She works in a…
a. hospital b. school c. post office d. farm
3. His father is a worker. He works in a…
a. hospital b. school c. post office d. factory
4. Mrs. Hoa is a librarian. She works in a…
a. hospital b. school c. library d. farm
5. Lan’s elder brother is a journalist. He writes for a…
a. hospital b. magazine c. post office d. library
6. She is a ……… . She work in a hospital.
a. teacher b. dentist c. fireman d. artist
<i><b>II. Complete Mary’s letter to Thao (7m)</b></i>
(1)……….., Thao
(2)………you ? I’m fine. Thanks for your letter. I like hearing how students live
in your country. It’s very interesting.
I think you have fewer vacation than American students. Our longest vacation in summer. We
don’t have a (3)………holiday, but we celebrate the (4)…………..……… on
January 1. Our most important vacations are Easter ,(5) ………of (6)……….,
Thanksgiving and Christmas . We usually spend time with our families on these vacations.
What other vacations do you have? What do you often do during your vacations? And what do
you like doing? Please write soon and tell me.
Your friend,
(7)………..
<i><b>Answer:</b></i>
<i>I. Where do they work? Circle the correct answer for each of the following sentences (3m)</i>
<i>1. d 2. a 3. d 4. c 5. b </i> <i>6. b</i>
<i>II. Complete the letter from Mary to Thao (7m)</i>
<i>1. Dear</i> <i>2. How are</i> <i>3. Tet</i> <i>4. New Year </i>
<i>5. 4 th </i> <i>6.July</i> <i>7. Mary</i>
*COMMENTS:
………
………
………
………
………
Week 15
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about the activities of a farmer.Helping the Ss compare the worker’s activities
with the farmer’s activities (hours per week, days off, vacation, time)
- Developing reading, writing, listening and talking notes skills.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - The comparison: fewer… than; more … than
* Vocabulary: - Words relating to the job, vacations
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>Ss read Tim’s letter. Then answer the questions:</i>
<i>a. How many people are there in Tim’s family. (four)</i>
<i>b. What does Tim’s father do? (mechanic)</i>
<i>c. Where does he work? (in a factory)</i>
<i>d. What does Tim’s mother do?(housewife)</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T greets and call some ss to tell something
about their parents’ work. And one to retell
the work of Mr and Mrs Jones
Ss raise the hand to do
<b>* Pre – reading:</b>
T introduces the lesson
Ss listen
T elicits new words
Ss take notes
<b>* While-reading:</b>
T has ss read
Ss read in individual
T has ss answer
Ss answer the questions
<b>* Post – reading:</b>
<b>2. Read</b>
<i>New words :</i>
+ feed (v) , picture
+ buffalo (n) + buffalo shed (n)
+ collect (v), action
+ real (adj ) translation
+ crop (n) , picture
Answer:
1. He’s a farmer.
2. He works in the fields.
3. He starts his work at about nine o’clock.
4. Four or five times a year.
<b>3. Compare</b>
* Pair work
Ss ask and answer questions about vacations
and holidays.
T corrects the answers.
Ss copy down.
<b>* Pre-listening:</b>
T asks ss to identify the actions of each
picture.
Ss identify the actions of each picture.
Reviewing vocabulary:
<b>* While-listening:</b>
T has ss listen
Ss listen
T has ss compare the asnwer in pairs
Ss compare the answer in pairs
<b>* Post-listening:</b>
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects
<b>Hours</b>
<b>per week</b>
<b>Days off</b> <b>Vacation</b>
<b>time</b>
Mr.
Jones 40 two three-A
week
summer
vacation
Mr.
Tuan 84 One-fouror five
times a
year
No real
vacation
<b>4. Listen and take notes.</b>
+ Duty à to be on duty: <i>làm việc</i>
+ Annual (adj) : hàng năm
<b>Answer:</b>
<b>Name</b> <b>Job</b> <b>Hoursper</b>
<b>week</b>
<b>Amount of</b>
<b>vacation</b>
Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks
Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks
Jane Shop assistant 35 1 week
Phong Factory worker 48 2 weeks
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Teacher reminds ss of the typical activities of a farmer and a mechanic.
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Learn new words at home; Do exercise B3 (workbook/page 46); Prepare Unit 8-A1, 2
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Asking the way to somewhere
- Developing speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Polite request with: “Could you …?”
Expression for asking for and giving directions.
- Giving the correct names of some places.
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting, work in pairs, playing the roles.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>Ss read the text (B 2 – page 77)</i>
<i>Answer these questions:</i>
<i>a. What does Mr, Tuan do? (a farmer)</i>
<i>b. What time does he start his work? (nine a.m.)</i>
<i>c. What time does he come back home? (at four p.m)</i>
<i>d. How many times a year does Mr. Tuan take a day off? (four or five times)</i>
<i>3- correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T leads in with some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
Review names of service places.
T has Ss look at the picture of buildings and
name those buildings.
Ss identify the places and give names of the
places.
T corrects mistakes if necessary.
T plays the tape and asks Ss listen to the
dialogue.
T gives practice in asking the way and giving
directions.
T has Ss look at the picture and guess.
<i>+ Who are they?</i>
<i>+ What does the tourist want?</i>
<i>(Students answer)</i>
T introduces the situation: We are going to
hear a conversation between Nga and a
foreigner. A tourist asks the way. You listen
and answer this question: <i>“Where does the</i>
<i>tourist want to go?”</i>
T asks Ss to listen to the tape again and repeat.
T introduces expressions for asking for and
<b>1. Name the places</b>
Answer:
a. National Bank of Vietnam (In Hanoi)
(picture)
b. Saint Paul Hospital(in Ha Noi) (picture)
c. Hotel (in Ha Noi)
d. The Central Post Office (in Ha Noi)
(picture)
e. Hanoi Railway Station (picture)
f. Dong Xuan Market (in Ha Noi)(picture)
<b>2. Listen and repeat. Then practice the</b>
<b>dialogue with a partner.</b>
(free answer)
giving directions:
Ss practice in pairs the dialogue and change the role.
- T has Ss listen to the dialogue b.
(Precede the above steps with dialogue b.)
Ss substitute the words of places for practice.
- Is there …… near here?
- Could you tell me how to get there?
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- Reminds the Ss of <b>prepositions of position</b> and expression for asking for and giving
directions.
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Learn by heart A2/ Page 80
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Asking for and giving directions to some places.
- Developing listening and speaking skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: </i>- Polite request with: “Could you …?”
<i>* Vocabulary:</i> souvenir shop, railway station …
- Expression for asking for and giving directions.
- Giving the correct names of some places.
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>T asks ss about the sentences use to ask the way </i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T calls ss to say th structures used to ask for
theway again .
Ss raise the hand to do
* Say the structures used to ask for the way:
<b>Could you tell / show me the way how to </b>
<b>go to … ?</b>
* Now there are 8 places in the box. Look at
the street map to say their posittion.
T has Ss look at the street map.
Ss identify different places.
T has Ss listen careful and repeat chorally.
T demonstrates the dialogue with two Ss.
Ss practice with given cues in the box.
( alternating roles)
T guides Ss practice in pairs.
T calls on 2 pairs to perform their task.
Ss give comments on their friends’
performance.
T gives corrections of help.
T asks Ss to look at the map above.
T uses one of the places in the map and makes
sentences that show the way to go there.
T explains the requirement.
T has Ss listen twice.
Ss try to remember the places in the map
(giving directions)
T has Ss listen again à gives corrections.
Ss listen, give names, check.
<b>3. Look at this street map. Practice the</b>
<b>dialogue with a partner</b>
<i>Now, look at the street map again. Listen</i>
<i>and write the paces.</i>
a. Go straight ahead to the second street.
Turn left. What is on the right? <i><b>(The </b></i>
<i><b>souvenir shop.)</b></i>
b. Go Straight ahead. Turn right into the first
street. What is on the left next to the
restaurant? <i><b>(The shoe store)</b></i>
c. What is on your left? <i><b>(The hotel)</b></i>
d. Go the second street. Turn right. What is
opposite the hotel<i><b>?(The drugstore)</b></i>
e. What is on your right<i><b>?(The hospital)</b></i>
<i>Answer:</i>
a. souvenir shop
b. shoe store
c. hotel
d. drugstore
e. hospital
( The street map, page 81)
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- Play the game: “I get lost”
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Practice part A3 at home; Prepare A4, A 4,5
<i> </i>*COMMENTS:
………
………
………
………
………
Week 16
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Talking about distances.
- Developing listening, listening and speaking skills.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Question with: “Could you …?”
- It takes + time + to-infinitive.
<i>* Vocabulary</i>: - Words relating to the topi “Places”
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
Using the picture to ask Ss about the vocabulary A3 and the positions of the bank, the
hospital.
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T greets and call one student to ask the way to
Ss raise the hand to do
T reviews the structure, asking about
distances.
T has Ss listen and repeat after the tape once
or twice, then pick up the new words.
T explains the new words.
T asks Ss to practice in pairs
T asks Ss to guess the distance between Hue
and Ho Chi Minh City whether it is true or
false.
T asks Ss to read the questions asking about
the distances.
Ss look at the map and the table of distances.
T gives more practice in asking for and giving
distancesà gives model.
<b>Practice</b>
T has ss work in pairs.
How far is it from …… to ……?
<b>4. Listen and repeat. Then practice the</b>
<b>dialogue with a partner.</b>
- coach(n) [kout∫]xe chạy đường dài
<b>5. Look at this table of distances in km.</b>
<b>Ask and answer questions</b>
<i><b>How far is it from … to… ?</b></i>
<i>It's (about)… km (kilometer(s))</i>
T calls on Ss to role play the dialogue.
T makes any necessary corrections.
T emphasizes the usage of the structures.
Ss apply in real situation. The table of distances in km (page 82
<i>4. Consolidation</i>:
Review structure: Asking about distances:
How far is it from … to …?
It’s (about) … km.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- Learn by heart dialogue of A4.
- Prepare B1,2.
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review:
o The present simple tense;
o The present progressive tense;
o The future simple tense.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Review
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
lesson plan
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<i>3- correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T leads in with some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
- T asks ss about the tense:
+ the use;
+ adverbs;
- What ‘s your name?
- Where do you live?
- What are you doing?
- What will you do tonight
<b>A. The present simple tense</b>
* Use to express: the truth, present habit.
Week: 17
+ structures.
- Ss answer.
- T take notes on the board.
- Ss copy.
- T asks ss about the tense:
+ the use;
+ adverbs;
+ structures.
- Ss answer.
- T take notes on the board.
- Ss copy.
- T asks ss about the tense:
+ the use;
+ adverbs;
+ structures.
- Ss answer.
- T take notes on the board.
- Ss copy.
* Adverbs: adverbs of frequency, every.
* Structures:
<i>1. Affirmative form:</i> ( Khẳng định)
I /We/You/They + V.bare
He/She/It + V-s/ es è
b, g, n, l, d, v, m, r + s
f, k, p, t, ay, uy,+ s
phu âm + y ies
<sub></sub>
(Be) à Am, is, are
(Have) à Have, has
<i>2. Negative form: </i>( Phủ định)
I /We/You/They + DO NOT + V.Bare.
He/She/It + DOES NOT + V.Bare.
<b> * add NOT after Be</b>
<i>3. Interrogative form</i>: ( Nghi vaán)
DO / DOES + S + V.Bare?
* Write Be before the Subjects
<b>* WH-questions: </b>
WH-questions + DO / DOES + S + V.
Bare?
<b>B. The present progressive tense</b>
* Use to express: action that is happening at
the speaking time.
* Now, at the moment, at present, listen,
look,… are used.
* Structures:
<i>1. Affirmative form</i>L Khẳng định)
S + am/ is/ are + V – ing
<i>2. Negative form</i><b>( Phủ định)</b>
S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing
<i>3. Interrogative form</i><b> ( Nghi vaán): </b>
Is/ Are + S + V-ing?
<b>C. The future simple tense</b>
<i>1. Affirmative form:</i><b> ( Khẳng định) </b>
<b>S + Will + V </b>
<i>2. Negative form</i><b>: ( Phủ định)</b>
<b>S + won’t + V</b>
<i>3. Interrogative form: </i><b> ( Nghi vaán): </b>
<b>Will + S + V ?</b>
<b>* Wh questions + will + S + V ? </b>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
ss ask and answer about personal information.
<i>5. Homework</i>
- prepare knowledge from unit 1 to unit 7 for the next period.
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review:
o Prepositions of position.
o Question words
o Exclamations
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: </i>- review
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, work in individual, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>T asks ss about the sentences use to ask the way </i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T asks ss to name the prepositions of position
they’ve learnt.
Ss name the prepositions of position they’ve
learnt.
takes notes on the board.
T asks ss to give some examples
T asks ss to name the question words they’ve
learnt.
Ss name the question words they’ve learnt.
T takes notes on the board.
- Where is your book?
- What is in front of the house?
- Is this flower beautiful?
<b>1. Prepositions of position</b>
- between
- in front of
- on
- in
- in the middle of
- behind
- …
<b>2. Question words</b>
- What: What is your name?
What is your job?
What is your date of birth?
What do/ does + S + do?
Week: 17
T asks ss to copy
T asks ss to write the structures of
exclamations.
Ss write the structures of exclamations.
they’ve learnt.
T corrects.
T asks ss to give examples
T asks ss to copy
- Where: Where do you live?
Where are you from?
- Which: Which grade are you in?
Which subject do you like best?
- Why: Why don’t you want to come?
- When: When will the movie start?
When’s your birthday?
- Who: Who is that?
<b>3. Exclamations</b>
What + a/ an + adj + N(singular)!
What + adj + N(plural)!
Ex: What a beautiful tree!
What an interesting book!
What nice dogs!
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Ss learn the structures by heart
- prepare knowledge from unit 1 to unit 7 for the next period.
<i> </i>*COMMENTS:
………
………
………
………
………
Week 17
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review:
o Comparatives and Superlatives
<i> (Chú ý một số so sánh bất quy tắc).</i>
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - review
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, listening, work in individual, eliciting.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T make a situation
Ss listen
T asks ss to write the structures of
comparatives of adjectives on the board.
<i>Notice some irregular comparisons.</i>
Ss write the structures of comparatives of
adjectives.
T corrects.
T asks ss to give examples.
Ss give examples
T asks ss to copy
T asks ss to write the structures of
superlatives of adjectives on the board.
<i>Notice some irregular comparisons.</i>
Ss write the structures of superlatives of
adjectives.
T corrects.
T asks ss to give examples.
- This book is 1,000 d. that book is 2,000 d
So this book is cheaper than that book.
<b>1. Comparatives of adjectives</b>
<i>a. Short adjectives</i>
’
S1 + to be + adj + er + than + S2
* good – better - * little –
less
* many – more
<i> b. Long adjectives</i>
S1 + to be + more + adj + than + S2
<b>2. Superlatives of adjectives</b>
<i>a. Short adjectives</i>
S+ to be + the adj + est
* good – best
* little – least
* more – most
<i> b. Long adjectives</i>
Ss give examples
T asks ss to copy
S + the most + adj
<i>4. Consolidation</i>:
1. Use the correct form of the adjective in brackets to complete the sentences.
a. This chair is (comfortable) than that chair.
<i>(Answer: more comfortable)</i>
b. The Nile is (long) river in the world.
<i>(Answer: the longest)</i>
c. This dress is (pretty) than that one.
<i>(Answer: prettier)</i>
d. Of all three sisters, Nga is (intelligent).
<i>(Answer: the most intelligent)</i>
e. Nam’s house is (beautiful) than Nga’s house.
<i>(Answer: more beautiful)</i>
f. The woman looks (pretty) than my mother.
<i>(Answer: prettier)</i>
g. This man is (happy) of all the three men.
<i>(Answer: the happiest)</i>
h. She has (many) books than I<i>.</i>
<i> (Answer: more)</i>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review:
o Is there a…? và Are there any…?
o Ordinal numbers
o Ask and answer about the time.
o Some types of exercises
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - review
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Cassette recorder and tape.
Week: 18
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>No checking</i>
<i>3- Revision</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T leads in with some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
T asks ss about the structures
T asks ss to write the structures on the board.
Ss write the structures on the board.
T corrects.
T asks ss to give some examples.
Ss give examples.
* Notice the answer.
T asks ss to read the ordinal numbers (page
24-English book)
T asks ss about the time.
T reminds ss of some ways to says about the
time.
T notices ss some other special cases.
What is there near your house?
How many people are in your house?
What’s the date?
<b>1. Is there a…? </b><i>and</i><b> Are there any…?</b>
<i><b>(Answer:</b>Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t)</i>
we use singular nouns
<i>Ex:</i> Is there a <b>book</b> on the table?
Is there a <b>desk</b> in your bedroom?
…
<b>b.Are there any…?</b>
<i><b>(Answer:</b>Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t)</i>
We use plural nouns
<i>Ex:</i> Are there any <b>books</b> in the bag?
Are there any <b>armchairs</b> in the living
room?
…
<b>2. Ordinal numbers</b>
(review)
Page 24 – English book
<b>3. Ask and answer about the time.</b>
Ask: What time is it?
<i>Answer: </i>
* Normal: It’s + số giờ + số phút
* Odd time: It’s + số phút + to/past + số giờ
* Even time: It’s + số giờ + o’clock
<i>NOTE: </i>
A B
T reminds ss of some types of exercises that
may have in the final test.
T gives example and asks ss to do them.
T corrects if necessary.
.
*) Nếu kim phút ở trong khoảng từ hơn hơn
6 giờ đến dưới 12 giờ (phần A) thì nói giờ
kém.
*) 15 phút = a quarter
*) 30 phút = half
<b>4. Some types of exercises</b>
a). <i>Choose the best option to complete each</i>
<i>of the following sentences</i>
<i>Circle or cross the letter before the correct</i>
<i>answer</i>
<i>Ex: Mai…a student.</i>
<i>a. are b. is c. am</i>
<i>The answer is b</i>
<b>b). </b><i>Read a text and check True or False the</i>
<i>boxes</i>
<i>Review the reading text from Unit 1 to Unit</i>
<i>7-English 7</i>
<b>c) </b><i>Write complete sentences using the words</i>
<i>given.</i>
<i>Ex: Nam/ tall/ than/ Hoa</i>
<i>Nam is taller than Hoa.</i>
<b>d) </b><i>Write the correct tense of the verb in</i>
<i>brackets</i>
<i>Ex: Hung usually (play)…soccer on</i>
<i>Saturday afternoon.</i>
<i>The answer is PLAYS</i>
<b>e) </b><i>Listen and complete the text</i>
<b>f) </b><i>Listen and check the answer</i>
<b>g)</b><i> Listen and check T or F</i>
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
Answer:
- Is it half past eight?
- What time is it now?
- Is there a river near your hous?
- Are there any trees behind your house?
<i>5. Homework.</i>
Prepare the first semester examination
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Check students’ knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 8
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
Grammar and vocabulary (review)
Chủ đề <sub>TN</sub>Nhận biết<sub>TL</sub> <sub>TN</sub>Thông hiểu<sub>TL</sub> <sub>TN</sub>Vân dụng<sub>TL</sub> Tổng
Language
focus
7
1.75
3
0.75
10
2.5
Reading 2
0.5
4
2.0
7
2.5
Writing 5 <sub>2.5</sub> 10 <sub>2.5</sub>
Listening 5
2.5
5
2.5
I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5 ms)
<i> Circle the best answer A, B, C or D</i>
1. Let’s ……….some stamps.
A. collects B. tocollect C. collecting D. collect
2. ... nice colors!
A. How B.Where C.What D.Which
3. We ... around the world next year.
A. will travel B. to travel C. travels D. travelling
4. What will you do during your vacation?
A. I often help my parents. C. I like to help my parents.
B. I will help my parents. D. I help my parents.
5. Vietnamese students have ...vacations than American ones
A. fewer B. longer C. most D. less
6. How ...is it from Hue to Da Nang?
A.long B. big C. far D. wide
7. Is there ………….…..in your bathroom? – Yes, there is.
A. two shower B. showers C. a shower D. shower
8. It’s half past nine or we can say:
A. nine to thirty B. nine thirty C. thirty nine D. nine past thirty
9. Mai learns how to use a……….in her Computer Science class.
A. computer B. refrigerator C. car D. machine
10. Would you like………to my house for dinner?
A. coming B. to come C. come D. to come
Week: 18
II/. READING. (2.5 ms)
<i>Read the passage carefully:</i>
Mr Ha lives in a house near the sea. It’s an old house, about 100 years old, and it’s very
small. There are two bedrooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs next to
the kitchen and there’s a living room where there’s a lovely fireplace. There’s a garden in front
of the house. The garden goes down to the beach and in spring and summer there are flowers
everywhere. He lives with his dog, Boxer. His friends often stay with him. He loves his house
for many reasons: the garden, the flowers in the summer , the fire in winter, but the best thing is
<i>A. True or false? Check ( X )the boxes.</i>
<b>True False</b>
1. Mr. Ha lives in a big house near the sea.
2. He has a dog.
<i>B. Answer the questions:</i>
1. How many bedrooms are there in Mr. Ha’s house ?
………
2. Is the house old or new?
………
3. Where is the bathroom?
………
4. What is his dog’s name?
………
III/. WRITING (2.5 )
<i> Write the right sentences with the cues given.</i>
1 is/ bigger/ than your school/ My school?
2. What / interesting / story/ an!
3. we/ play/ Should/ basketball?
4. go / Let’s/ the cafeteria /to?
5. more /lemon juice/ than her sister/ Hoa/ drinks
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
<i>Listen and fill in each blank</i>
Mr Hoan is a farmer. He grows rice, vegetables and (1)……..… cattles. Every morning , he
(2)………… starts work at six o’clock. He feeds the buffalo, pigs and (3)……….and
collects the eggs. From about nine in the morning until five in the afternoon, he (4)…………
with his son, Quang in the field . But they rest and have lunch at twelve o’clock. At five in the
afternoon, they come back home. Mr Hoan (5)………. animals again. He often finishes
work at a quarter past six.
ANSWER KEY
I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A
6. C 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. D
II/. READING.
<i>Read the passage carefully:</i>
<i>A. True or false? Check ( </i><b>X )</b><i>the boxes.</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm
1. F 2. T
<i>B. Answer the questions</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm
1. There are two bedrooms.
2. It’s old.
3. The bathroom is downstairs next to the kitchen
4. It’s Boxer
III/. WRITING (2.5 )
<i> Write the right sentences with the cues given</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm
1. My school is bigger than your school?
2. What an interesting story!
3. Should we play basketball?
4. Let’s go to the cafeteria?
5. Hoa drinks more lemon juice than her sister.
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
Mỗi chỗ trống đúng 0,25 điểm
Mr Hoan is a farmer. He grows rice, vegetables and (1) <b>raises</b> cattles. Every morning , he
(2) <b>usually</b> starts work at six o’clock. He feeds the buffalo, pigs and (3) <b>chickens</b> and collects
Week 18
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
Help ss find their mistakes in their test and five the correct answer.
<i><b>II Language content :</b></i>
Grammar and vocabulary (review from unit 1 to 8))
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Give a speech, explanation, reading.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>No checking</i>
<i>3- Correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
T shows some common mistakes
Ss listen
T has ss give the answer
Ss give the answer
T corrects and explains
T reads and writes the answer and explains
Ss listen and copy down
T suggests how to write
Ss follow to the teacher
I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5 m)
Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm
1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A
6. C 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. D
II/. READING.
<i>Read the passage carefully:</i>
<i>A. True or false? Check ( </i><b>X )</b><i>the boxes.</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm
1. F 2. T
<i>B. Answer the questions</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm
1. There are two bedrooms.
2. It’s old.
3. The bathroom is downstairs next to
the kitchen
4. It’s Boxer
III/. WRITING (2.5 )
<i> Write the right sentences with the cues given</i>
Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm
1. My school is bigger than your school?
2. What an interesting story!
3.Should we play basketball?
Week: 19
T has ss listen to the passage
Ss listen
T gives the answer
Ss copy down
4. Let’s go to the cafeteria?
5. Hoa drinks more lemon juice than her sister.
IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)
Mỗi chỗ trống đúng 0,25 điểm
Mr Hoan is a farmer. He grows rice,
vegetables and (1) <b>raises</b> cattles. Every
morning , he (2) <b>usually</b> starts work at six
o’clock. He feeds the buffalo, pigs and (3)
<b>chickens</b> and collects the eggs. From about
nine in the morning until five in the
afternoon, he (4) <b>works </b> with his son, Quang
in the field . But they rest and have lunch at
twelve o’clock. At five in the afternoon, they
come back home. Mr Hoan (5) <b>feeds</b>
animals again. He often finishes work at a
quarter past six.
<i>4. Consolidation</i>:
Ss read the test again.
<i>5. Homework:</i>
- Learn by heart dialogue of A4.
- Prepare B1,2.
<i> </i>
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to ask about prices.
- Developing listening and reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar:</i> - Asking and answering about prices: “How much is/ are …?”
<i>* Vocabulary: </i>words related to the topic : Places”
<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>
Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual, work in pairs, playing the roles.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
lesson plan
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
No checking
<i>3- correct the test</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>
T leads in with some questions.
Ss listen and answer.
T elicits (using the picture): There are Liz and
Clerk.
-Where are they? (At the post office)
What can you do at the post office?
(I can send letters, post cards, send and
receive parcels, money, make long/short
distance telephone calls, buy envelopes,
stamps).
T explains new structures and vocabulary.
T has Ss listen à repeat after the tape.
(optional)
T guides Ss practice in pairs to perform in
front is the class.
T has ss read in silence to answer the
questions à check à give out.
T explains the requirement.
T introduces the situation of the dialogue:
Nga and Hoa are going to the post office after
school. Guess, what do they want to do?
Ss guess. (free guess)
T plays the tape and gets ss’ answers.
T explains new words.
T asks ss to read the dialogue in groups of
two.
Ss work in groups of two.
T asks ss to perform the dialogue before the
class.
- T asks ss to ask and answer the questions in
pairs.
- T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking
and answering the questions before the class.
- Ss practice asking and answering the
- What is this? (stamp)
- Where can we buy it?
<b>1. Listen and read. Then practice with a</b>
<b>partner.</b>
- I’d like + V
- How much is/ are…?
- envelope(n)
- altogether(adv): tổng cộng
- change (n): tiền lẻ, thừa lại
- cost(n): giá, có giá là
<i>Practice</i>
<i>Answer: </i>
<i>a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA</i>
<i>b. She pays 11,500 dong altogether.</i>
<i>c. She receives 3,500 dong in change.</i>
<i>d, e. Sts’ answer.</i>
<b>2. Listen and read. Then answer the</b>
<b>questions.</b>
- mail(v)
- overseas(adj) translation
<i>Answer:</i>
a. Hoa needs some local stamps for overseas
mail and a phone card.
questions before the class.
- T corrects.
Ss copy the answers.
c. She needs a phone card to call (phone) her
parents (one a week).
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- Would like (’d like), want/ wants, need/needs + N/to-infinitive.
- How much is/are + S?
- How much do/does + S + cost?
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Do exercise of B1, page 83.
- Prepare B3, 4, 5..
<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>
- Services at the post office.
- Making purchases.
- Developing listening, speaking, writing and reading skills.
<i><b>II. Language content </b></i>
<i>* Grammar: </i>
- Asking for information about services at the post office.
- Need to do some thing/ Need sth.
- Writing the prices.
<i>* Vocabulary:</i> a part from
<i><b>III. Techniques</b></i>
Asking and answering, reading, work in individual, eliciting, playing the roles, work in pairs.
<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>
Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape.
<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>
<i>1- Greeting and checking attendance:</i>
<i>2- Review of the previous lesson:</i>
<i>No checking</i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up :</b>
T asks
Ss answer
T asks ss some questions about the previous
lesson.
Questions:
1. What does Hoa need from the post office?
<i>- Do you often send letters?</i>
<i>- How much is a local stamp?</i>
<b>3. Complete the dialogue. Then make up</b>
<b>similar dialogues; use the words in the</b>
<b>box.</b>
2. Why does she need stamps for oversea mail?
3. Why does she need a phone card?
Ss answer.
T explains the requirement.
T has Ss read and complete the dialogue
(page 84).
T asks some pairs to read aloud their dialogue
in front of the class.
T offers help as necessary.
T asks Ss to make similar dialogues in pairs,
alternating roles.
T calls some ss to perform new dialogues
before the class.
T has Ss look at the picture and introduces the
situation:
<i>“Mrs. Robinson buys some things. Let’s listen</i>
<i>and write the prices of each item”. (With take</i>
<i>notes).</i>
T has Ss listen three time (books closed)
T has Ss listen once more (books opened)
T let ss answer the questions.
T gives corrections:
T gives practice in asking and answering
questions.
T has Ss ask and answer the questions in
pairs.
T explains new word.
T calls some Ss to perform their task.
T corrects ss’ mistakes.
Ss copy the answers in their exercise books.-
Answer:
<i>Hoa:</i> I would <i><b>like</b></i> five local stamps and two
stamps for America.
<i>Clerk: </i>Here you <i><b>are</b></i>. Is that all?
<i>Hoa:</i> I also need a fifty thousand dong
phone card. How <i><b>much</b></i> is that
altogether?
<i>Clerk:</i> That <i><b>is</b></i> seventy-five thousand dong.
<i>Hoa:<b>Here</b></i> is eighty thousand dong.
<i>Clerk:</i> Thanks. Here’s your <i><b>change.</b></i>
<b>4. Listen and write the price of each of</b>
<b>these five items.</b>
Answer:
<i>The total cost is 59,000 dong.</i>
<i>She will have 1,000 dong in change.</i>
<b>5. Answer the following questions</b>
- a part from: (adv): ngoại trừ
<i>Answer:</i>
a. It is 800 dong to mail a local letter in
Vietnam.
b. A letter to America costs (11,500 dong.)
c. A part from stamps, the post office also
sells envelops, telephone cards,…
d. Students’ answers
<i>4. Consolidation</i>
- Has some Ss read again the dialogue B3
<i>5. Homework</i>
- Do the exercise B2, B3.
- Prepare unit 9. A 1
<i> </i> Week 19
<b>I. Objectives</b>
<b>Week:1 (20)</b>
<b>Period: 55</b>
- Talking about the activities in the past.
- Developing listening and speaking skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- The past simple tense with irregular verbs.
* Vocabulary:
- Words relating to the vacation (vacation, gift)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Role play
- Questions – answers
- Arrangement.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
Pictures, real thing, cassette recorder + tape
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson: (5’)</b></i>
Using the pictures (Unit 8 A1 or A5) Questions and answers
- Would you like to go there?
- Do you often go three?
- How far is it from your house?
- Who was there?
- Are there any interesting places or any souvenir shops?
<b>3- New lesson</b>:
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’activities</b> <b>Content</b>
* Questions – Answers:
-T: What do you often do on your
summer holiday?
-Ss: Answer
-T: Do you often go to Nha Trang?
-Ss: Answer
-T: What do you do there?
-Ss: Go swimming, eat seafood, and
take photos.
-T: Liz had a vacation in Nha Trang.
Now she is talking to Ba about her
resent vacation. Please listen to the
tape to learn what Liz thought of Nha
Trang? And what did Liz do there?
-Ss: Listen to the tape once.
* Teaching new words:
1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.
*Warm up
(Using a real thing)
- Ss listen and repeat after the tape.
-Ss: practice dialogue in pairs.
* Teaching grammar:
PAST SIMPLE TENSE WITH
IRREGULAR VERBS
-T: write down the sentences that use
the simple past tense and explain
how to use
-Ss: Listen and repeat the sentences
after the teacher.
- T: tell me the places Liz visited and
the things she did.
- Ss: individual work.
-Ss: listen to the tape again and check
“number the sentences” (page 87)
-Ss: Make similar conversations
about their activities on their past
holidays.
-vacation = holiday (n)
-gift (n)
-aquarium (n)[ə'kweriəm]: bể/hồ cá
-The people were very friendly.
-The food was delicious.
-Most things weren’t cheap.
-Did you buy any souvenirs in Nha Trang?
<i>Yes, I did. I bought a lot of different gifts for</i>
<i>my friends in America.</i>
-Were you tired after the trip?
<i>No, I wasn’t. I had a great time.</i>
*<b>Note</b>: Did not = Didn’t
was not = wasn’t
were not = weren’t
<i><b>Now answer. Number the sentences.</b></i>
3-Liz bought souvenirs.
2-Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
4-Liz returned to Ha Noi.
1-Liz went to Nha Trang.
5-Liz talked to Ba about her vacation.
<b>4- Consolidation</b>
-T helps Ss read the sentences that use the simple past tense again.
<b>5- Homework</b>
- Write sentences about their activities on their past holidays with the simple past tense.
-Prepare( A2,3)
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about the activities Liz’s family at Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
- Talking about the journey of Robinson’s family.
- Developing listening,reading and speaking skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
-Review past simple tense with irregular verbs.
- New teaching past tense with regular verbs.
* Vocabulary:
- Words relating to the (shark, dolphin, turtle, crab, cap poster)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions – answers
- Story - telling
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
Pictures, cassette recorder + tape
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance.</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson (5’)</b></i>
* Questions – Answers:
- Where did Liz go on her vacation?
- What did she think of Nha Trang?
- When did Liz talk to Ba about her recent vacation?
<i><b>3-</b><b>New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
-T:
+ Do you visit Nha Trang?
+ Where can you see the sea animals?
+ Have you come go Tri Nguyen
Aquarium?
- Students answer.
-T: Now let’s come to Tri Nguyen
Aquarium with Liz’s family.
-Students listen to the tape with their
books closed (once)
-Students open their books and listen to
the tape.
* Review simple past tense of irregular
verbs and teach new words.
-Students read the text:
+ Silent reading
2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.
Go – went See – saw
Think – thought Be
(is/am/are)-Buy – bought Was/were
Wear – wore Have –had
Eat – ate Put – put.
-Shark(n): cá mập
-Turtle ['tə: rt̬əl] (n): <i>con rùa</i>
-Dolphin ['dɔlfin] (n): <i>cá heo</i>
-Food stall: <i>quầy thực phẩm</i>
* Questions - Answer
-Students work in pair: answer the
questions.
-T calls some ss to practice before
class.
-T corrects.
<b>Consolidation</b>
- T explains the requirement.
- T shows the pictures.
- Students tell the story of Liz’s trip to
the aquarium.
*Note: Use past form of the verbs.
- T calls some ss to perform before
class.
- Student: individual work.
-T corrects if necessary.
-T:
Did you go there?
How do you go there?
Did the Robinsons come there?
The Robinsons had a great holiday in
Nha Trang.
- T says: Now listen to the tape
carefully then check the answer in your
books.
- Students read 5 pairs of sentences in
text book: a-b, c-d, e-f, g-h, i-j.
- Students listen to the cassette careful
and make a cross into the sentences the
same contents in text book.
-T plays the cassette again.
-Cap(n): <i>mũ lưỡi trai</i>
-Exit ['eksət](n): <i>lối ra, cửa ra</i>
Answer:
<i>a. Her parents went to the aquarium with her.</i>
<i>b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and many </i>
<i>different types of fish.</i>
<i>c. They bought a cap and a poster.</i>
<i>d. Yes, she did. Liz wore the cap all day.</i>
<i>e. Yes. They ate fish and crab.</i>
<i>f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the</i>
<i>aquarium.</i>
<i>*NOW TELL THE STORY OF LIZ’S TRIP TO THE</i>
<i>AQUARIUM.</i>
<i>BEGIN WITH:</i>
a. The Robinson family went to the aquarium.
<i>b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and many</i>
<i>colorful fish.</i>
<i>c. There was a souvenir shop near the exit of the</i>
<i>aquarium.</i>
<i>d. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap with a picture of</i>
<i>a dolphin on it. Mrs. Robinson bought Liz a poster.</i>
<i>e. After their visit to the aquarium, the Robinsons</i>
<i>went to a food stall. Mr. Robinson and Mrs.</i>
<i>Robinson ate fish and crab and Liz ate noodles.</i>
3. Listen. Write the letter of the sentences you hear.
* Warm – up: (Picture of Nha Trang)
Chatting
-Ss: Close the book and listen.
* Questions and answers:
- T: Check the key.
- Ss: Say the content again.
<i><b>4- Consolidation:</b></i>
T and Ss repeat and remember information about the trip of Liz's family to Nha Trang.
Remember past of verbs .
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Review the vocabulary
- Rewrite Liz’s story.
- Prepare A4
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about Ba’s diary.
- Developing reading, writing skills to get information.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Past simple tense with irregular and regular verbs, simple present tense and simple future
tense.
* Vocabulary:
- Review the words relating to listening.
- improve, keep in touch
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions – answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
Pictures, cassette recorder + tape
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson (5’)</b></i>
<i> Student(s) read(s) or tell(s) the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium.</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
-T explains the requirement.
-T asks Ss to read sentence a) to g).
-T asks Ss to read Ba’s diary and check
the sentences a) to g).
-Ss read Ba’s diary and check the
sentences a) to g).
4. Read Ba’s diary
-improve (v)
-keep in touch (with someone)
Week:1 (20)
-T explains new words/phrases/ grammar
-T asks Ss to correct the incorrect
sentences.
- T calls some Ss to read the correct
sentences before class.
-T corrects Ss’ mistakes.
<b>Past simple tense with regular verbs:</b>
<i>adding ED when we change the regular</i>
<i>verbs into their past form.</i>
<b>A> TO BE:</b> I/ He/ She/ It + was
You/ They/ We + were
(can/ could, may/ might, will/ would,
*Nghi vấn:
Was/ Were + S …?
<b>B> ORDINARY VERBS: </b>
+ KĐ: S + V_ed/ V2 (irregular)
+ PĐ: S + DID NOT + V.Bare.
+ NV: DID + S + V.Bare?
+ WH: WH + DID + S + V.Bare?
*Regular verbs: Use 2nd<sub> column </sub>
<i><b>Answer</b></i>:
<i>a. Liz lived next door to Ba.</i>
<i>b. Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet Nam.</i>
<i>c. Ba collects stamps.</i>
<i>d. Liz’s aunt lives in New York.</i>
<i>e. The Robinsons moved to the other side</i>
<i>of Ha Noi.</i>
<i>f. The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is sad.</i>
<i><b>4-. Consolidation</b></i>
T reminds Ss of the simple past tense (regular verbs).
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
-Prepare B1, 2.Do exercise A1, 2, 3, 4 – page 53-55 – English exercise book.
Week: 20
<b>I. Objectives</b>
Singnature:
- Talking about the activities in the past
- Developing reading and listening skills
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
Past simple tense (review)
* Vocabulary: hairdresser, material, dressmaker
<b>III. Techniques</b>
Question-answer
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures.
- Role cards
- Read objects
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>Students go to the board and write the past form for each of these verbs:</i>
<i>Arrive>…….arrived</i>
<i>Help>……helped</i>
<i>Have>…..had</i>
<i>Go>…..went</i>
<i>See>…saw</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
- T (use the picture) asks Ss:
Who are they?
Where are they?
What are they doing?
- T says: Now listen to the tape to get
information from their conversation.
- T plays the cassette recorder.
- Ss repeat after the tape.
- T aks: What are Lan and Hoa talking
about? (dress, furniture)
* Teaching new words:
Practice controlled
- Ss read the dialogue.
- T asks Ss to read the questions
below the dialogue and answer them.
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>
*Warm – up
*Presentation
- Hairdresser(n): <i>thợ uốn/ cắt tóc nữ </i>
(haircutter)
- Material(n) [mə'tiri:əl]: <i>chất/ vật liệu</i>
- Ss: individual work
- T calls some Ss to ask and answer
the questions before class.
- Ss work in pair.
- T corrects.
- T asks Ss to read the example.
- T explains how to use past simple
tense
- T asks Ss to read the dialogue again
to get information.
- T calls some Ss to answer the
questions before class.
<i>Answer</i>:
a. She’s a hairdresser.
b. She’s a dressmaker.
<b>2. Answer</b>
Answer:
a. No, she didn’t.
b. No, she didn’t.
c. Yes, she did.
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
Remind ss of the past simple tense.
<i><b>5- Homework </b></i>
- Practice the dialogue at home.
- Prepare B3,4
- Do exercise 4 page 54 – English exercise book
<b>B.Neighbors</b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about what happened in the past
- Developing reading and writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Review past simple tense with regular and irregular verbs.
- Learn how to do something.
* Vocabulary:
- Words relating to sewing (fit, cushion, sew, needlework)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Role – play
- Story - telling
- Questions – answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures.
- Role cards.
- Real objects.
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>Students read the dialogueOr Teacher review the content of the dialogue by </i>
<i>asking students questions:</i>
<i>What does Hoa’s aunt do? (Hairdresser)</i>
<i>What did she do with Hoa’s hair? (She cut it)</i>
<i>Who is Mrs. Mai? ( Hoa’s neighbor)</i>
<i>What did she help Hoa? (She bought the material and made the dress for her)</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
*explain new words
-T says: <i>This is a needle and a thread.</i>
<i>We use them to sew or mend clothes.</i>
<i>Do you know how to sew?</i>
<i>When you sew, you are doing</i>
<i>needlework.</i>
<i>Did you learn how to sew or mend</i>
<i>clothes at school?</i>
<i>Now scan the text and find out what Hoa</i>
<i>made when she decided to learn how to</i>
<i>sew.</i>
- Students read the text and do task 1
(She made a cushion and a skirt)
- Teacher explain new words
Use a picture of a girl wearing a too
small T – shirt and another wearing a too
big T – shirt to teach the word “fit”.
- Students list the actions happened
during the text.
- T notices students the past form of
- T asks ss to read the questions and
answer them.
- Students compare their answers in
pairs.
<b>3. Read. Then answer</b>
* Questions and answers:
-sew(v) sewing(n)
Sewing machine
-material(n) [mə'tiri:əl]: chất/ vật liệu
-hobby(n): sở thích riêng
- try something on: thử cái gì
- fit(v): vừa, hợp
Answer:
<i>a. She learned (how) to use a sewing</i>
<i>machine.</i>
-T corrects the answers:
- T asks ss to read through the sentences.
- T aks ss to use the past form of the verb
in bracket.
- Reviewing past tense forms of verbs
(regular and irregular).
- Briefly explaining how to pronounce –
ED of regular verbs (/id/;/ t/;/d/)
* Learn how to do something (How to
swim, to cook, to ride a bike)
-T asks ss to draw their attention to
words indicating time order (first, then,
next, finally).
- Students review the sentences, using
the correct verb tense form.
- Some students read their complete
sentences aloud.
- T corrects
<i>c. It was blue and white.</i>
<i>d. Next, she made a skirt.</i>
<i>e. It was green with white flowers on it.</i>
<i>f. It looked very pretty.</i>
<i>g. She tried it on but it didn’t fit.</i>
<i>h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her.</i>
<b>4. Write. Put the verbs in brackets in the</b>
<b>simple past tense.</b>
<i><b>Answer:</b></i> watched – bought – cut – used –
decided, was – made, was, wasn’t – helped,
fitted
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
Remind ss of the simple past tense
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
- Practice saying the sentences containing past forms of regular and irregular verbs.
a. I watched my brother ride a bicycle
b. I decided to learn how to ride a bicycle.
- Prepare LANGUAGE FOCUS 3
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Reviewing the past form of the verbs
- Developing reading and writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
Reviewing:
- How much + is/are + S?
- Past simple tense.
- Prepositions of places
- Present simple tense.
- More, less, fewer
* Vocabulary:
- Reviewing the old words
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Role – play
- Questions – answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Flash cards, chart.
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2-Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i><b>* Using the pictures:</b></i>
1. Who went to the aquarium?
3. What did he buy for his daughter?
4. What did they eat for lunch?
<i><b>* Give the correct verb tense in brackets:</b></i>
1. How much (be) this/ that? (<i>is)</i>
2. He (buy) this hat yesterday. <i>(bought)</i>
3. Where you (go) five days ago? <i>(did…go )</i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
- T explains the requirement.
- Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Ss make similar dialogues by
themselves.
- T explains the requirement.
- T reminds ss of the prepositions of
places.
- T calls some ss to write the sentences
on the board.
<b>1. How much is it?</b>
a<i>) Work with a partner. Read the dialogue.</i>
<i>Lan: How much is the green dress?</i>
<i>Assistant: It’s 30, 000 dong.</i>
<i>Lan: And what about the violet</i> ['vaiələt -tím]
<i><b> dress?</b></i>
<i>Assistant: It’s 35, 000 dong.</i>
b) <i>Now make similar dialogues.</i>
<b>2. Prepositions</b>
<i>a) Look at the map. Write the location of</i>
<i>each store.</i>
- T corrects.
- T explains the requirement.
- T asks ss to read the example.
- Ss practice in pairs.
- T corrects.
- T explains the requirement.
- T sticks the table of the verbs on the
board.
- T calls ss to complete it.
- T corrects.
- T explains the requirement.
- T calls ss to complete the sentences.
(read or write on the board)
- T corrects.
- T explains the requirement.
- T asks ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs.
- T corrects students’ mistakes in
pronunciation.
<i>- The restaurant is on Hue Street. It’s next to/</i>
<i>beside the bookstore to the left. </i>
<i>- The minimart is on Hue Street. It’s next to/</i>
<i>beside the bookstore to the right.</i>
<i>- The hairdresser’s is on Tay Ho Street. It’s</i>
<i>in the park on the right.</i>
<i>- The library is on Tay Ho Street. It’s</i>
<i>opposite the hairdresser’s.</i>
<i>b) Look at the table. Ask and answer</i>
<i>questions with a partner.</i>
<i><b>Ex: A: How far is it from the shoe store to</b></i>
<i>the minimart?</i>
<i> B: It’s 500 meters</i>
<b>3. Past simple tense.</b>
<i>a) Write the past form of the verbs in the</i>
<i>table.</i>
<i>VERB</i> <i>PAST FORM</i>
buy bought
help <i>helped</i>
remember <i>remembered</i>
take <i>took</i>
send <i>sent</i>
think <i>thought</i>
talk <i>talked</i>
<i>b) Complete the sentences. Use the words in</i>
<i>the box.</i>
<i>- </i>I <i>played </i>volleyball last week.
- Yesterday, I <i>talked </i>to my grandmother.
- Last December, Mom <i>bought</i> me a new
bike.
- Dad <i>worked </i>in Hue a few years ago.
- I <i>sent</i> a letter to my pen pal last month.
<b>4. Simple tenses</b>
Look at Nga’s diary and complete the
dialogue.
Nga: Everyday I clean my room, <i>help my</i>
<i>Mom</i> and <i>study English</i>.
Minh: What did you do yesterday?
Nga: I <i>cleaned my room, helped my Mom,</i>
<i>studied English, watched TV, played</i>
<i>volleyball,</i> and <i>stayed at Hoa’s house.</i>
Minh: How about tomorrow?
- T gives the missing words.
- T explains the requirement and the
use of those words.
- Ss work in groups of two.
- T calls some ss to write the sentences
on the board.
<i>grandmother</i> and <i>buy new shoes.</i>
<b>5. more, less and fewer</b>
Write new sentences
Before there were 4 bananas. Now there are <b>fewer</b> bananas.
Before there were 500ml of orange juice. Now there is <b>more</b> orange juice.
Before there were 200 grams of butter. Now there is <b>more</b> butter.
Before there were no cabbages. Now there is one cabbage.
Before there was a lot of milk. Now there is <b>less </b>milk.
Before there were 2 tomatoes. Now there are <b>more </b>tomatoes.
Before there were 2 onions. Now there aren’t any onions.
Before there were no chickens. Now there is one chicken.
Before there were 2 eggs/ not many eggs. Now there are <b>more/</b> a lot of eggs.
<i><b>4- Consolidation:</b></i>
Remind ss grammar above.
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
Prepare Unit 10 – A1
Week 21
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Students know how to talk about personal hygiene.
- Developing reading and writing skill.
<b>II. Language conents</b>
Singnature:
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present simple tense (review)
- Past simple tense (review)
- Frequency (review)
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
- harvest (n)
- iron (v)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions – answers
- Brainstorming.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures: (Hoa’s picture)
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i> </i> <i>No checking</i>
<i><b>3-New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
-T: What do you know about Hoa? (Who
is she? Where do her parents live? What
is their job?) using picture
- Some students talk in front of the class.
T: Now we read a letter from Hoa’s
mother.
-T reads the letter.
-Ss listen to the teacher; find it there are
any new words.
-T explains new words
(- Teacher can use picture (p33) to help
students understand the main content of
the letter).
- Students do as directed, then read the
letter.
- T asks ss to read the questions from a) to
e) and answer them.
- T asks ss to compare their answers in
pairs.
<i><b>1. Read. Then answer the questions.</b></i>
<i>Warm – up </i>
* Brainstorming
<i>Pre-reading</i>
-Harvest (v) (n): mùa gặt/ vụ thu hoạch
Harvest time
-Iron (v)
- yourself:reflexive pronoun:[đại từ phản thân]
-write – wrote(v)
<i>While reading</i>
Take morning exercises
Take care of oneself
- T calls some ss to ask and answer the
questions before class.
- Students ask and answer the questions
before class.
- Teacher corrects gives right answers.
- students talk what they do to take care of
them, then present in front of the class.
<i>Post reading</i>
<b>Answer</b>:<b> </b> Answer questions on page 100
<i>a. They are busy because it’s almost harvest time.</i>
<i>e. Her mother wants her to:</i>
<i> do her own washing and ironing.</i>
<i>She doesn’t want Hoa to:</i>
<i> eat too much candy.</i>
<i>stay up late.</i>
<i>Further</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
Review the content of the letter (Students review with the help of the teacher).
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Do A1, A2 on page 61 (work book).
- Do the talk “what should we do to take care of ourselves” in oral and writing.
-Write what you do every day.
- Prepare A2,3.
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Students know how to talk about daily activities.
- Developing listening and writing skill.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
- Reviewing the present simple tense
* Vocabulary:
- Polish (v)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Role – play
- Brainstorming
- Gap filling
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Some pictures relate to someone’s daily activities.
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<b>1-</b><i><b>Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<b>2- </b><i><b>Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>- Review the old lesson: talk about what he/she does to take care of herself/ himself.</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
Ask some students interview their
classmates “What they do every day”
Then talk it to the rest of the class
T: In the part A2 we listen what Hoa did
yesterday. Look at the pictures on page 100.
Now tell me what she did.
S: do as directed, teacher explains new
word
-Teacher gives tasks: listen and put the
pictures in order they hear.
-Teacher plays the tape three times
1st<sub> time : just listen </sub>
2nd<sub> time: listen and put pictures on order.</sub>
3rd<sub> time: listen and check</sub>
- Student compares their result in pairs.
- Some student say their result
- Teacher corrects
a) ; e) ; f) ; d) ; g) ; c) ; h) ; b)
?What did we listen about Hoa in A2
Students remember the listening and
answer.
<i>Now we read Nam’s dairy with detail in </i>
<i>time.</i>
* Read the text, and then answer the
following sentences.
<b>2.Listen</b>
<i>Listen and put the pictures in the order </i>
<i>you hear</i>.
*Warm up
*Pre- listening
polish (v)(using picture): clean
Polish (v)
*While – listening
*Post – listening
1. What time does Nam get up/eat
breakfast/ do homework.
2. What does he have for breakfast?
3. What did they go after breakfast?
4. What time does Nam go home?
--Teacher gives students tasks: read and
write about themselves, them practice ask
and answer in pair.
-Teacher and students practice as a model.
* Write their dairy and practice ask and
answer in pairs (using information they
write in their diary).
* Some pairs practice in front of the class.
<i><b>Write about yourself. Complete a diary </b></i>
<i><b>entry like Nam’s. Then practice with </b></i>
<i><b>your partner. Ask these questions</b></i>.
What do you do every day?
What time do you get up/ eat breakfast/
do homework/ go to bed…?
<i><b>4- Consolidation </b></i>
Teacher reminds ss what Hoa did
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Section A3, A4 unit 10 (work book)
- Do a talk “what I did yesterday with detail in time”
- Prepare to write a letter to your friend (live in the country) and you live in the city.
- Prepare A4.
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Developing skill of reading the letter, aiming at writing a reply.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Review the simple present, simple past
Week:3 (22)
* Vocabulary:
- Strange (n)
- don’t worry (exp)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Gap filling - Questions and answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- A model letter in Unit 7 (page 73 – English 6)
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendace</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>- Review the previous lesson: some student talk what they did yesterday.</i>
<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
- T asks:
<i>Who send Hoa a letter in A1?</i>
<i>What did she write to Hoa?</i>
- Ss answer.
- T introdudes the situation
<i>In this period, we read Hoa’s letter in gaps.</i>
- T asks ss to read and fill in gaps
-Students read and find the appropriate form of
verbs to fill in gaps.
<b>Note:</b> phrases of verbs were learned in the
previous lessons.
- Students can discuss in groups and write what
they fill in the board, compare in groups
Teacher correct and gives the key .
*Warm up
4. Write. Complete Hoa’s reply to her
mother with suitable verbs.
*Pre- writing
*While – writing
*Post – writing ( Consolidation)
<b>Answer: </b>
<i>Was; having; show; take; get; go; wash; </i>
<i>iron; eating; told; see; go</i>
<b>4- Consolidation:</b>
- Student discusses how to write a letter to their grandmother, and then write in groups.
-T asks students to look at the letters in A2 and A4 to give form of them (heading and
ending) with some expressions are used.
- T asks some ss to read their letters before class.
- T corrects
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Learn some more regular verbs and irregular verbs remember.
- Tell parts of the body.
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Helps student how to describe events in a dentist’s
- Developing speaking and listening skills.
Singnature:
<b>II. Language contents</b>
<i>* Grammar:</i>
- Present simple (review)
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
- Cavity (n)
- Toothache (n)
- Drill (n)
- Appointment (n)
- fill (v)
- Hurt (v)
- feel (v)
- Scared (adj)
<b>III. Techniques:</b>
- Role – play
- Questions - Answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>
- Pictures of oral hygiene
- Tapes
<b>V. Procedures :</b>
<i><b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>- Review the old lesson. Teacher delivers worksheets, ask students </i>
<i><b>3-New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
* Brainstorming:
-T says: <i>What did Hoa do to take care of her</i>
<i>teeth in her letter in worksheet?</i>
S: <i>brushes her teeth before bedtime</i>
T: What will happen if we don’t does like
Hoa?
S: toothache
-T: uses gestures to shoe meaning new word:<sub></sub>
toothache
-T: What should we do if we have a
toothache?
- S: đi đến nha sĩ
-T: What does the dentist do when you come
to see him?
S: trám răng
-T ask: Are you scared to come there?
(gesture)
- Teacher uses picture to show a cavity in
teeth new word.
1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.
*Warm – up
Toothache(n)
Dentist (n)
-T says: <i>In B1 Minh has a toothache. Listen</i>
<i>the conversation between Hoa and Minh and</i>
<i>answer.</i>
1. What is Minh going do at 10.30?
2. What happen to Hoa last week?
3. How did the dentist help Hoa?
-Student listen to the tape twice; Practice in
pairs; discuss and find answers to the
questions; give answers; give answers before
the class.
-Teacher corrects
-Teacher asks students the dialogue again,
-Teacher corrects
-T uses the picture on page 104, asks students
to look at, guess and answer questions on A2
(some students give their answers in oral)
-Teacher asks students to listen twice and
note the information needed for the answers,
give the table to note.
-Students do as directed: listen and take note.
- Ss use note to answer
-Students listen to 3rd<sub> time to check their</sub>
answers.
-Students discuss in pairs, and then some
students give their answers in front of the
class.
-Teacher corrects. Let ss listen to the tape
again and check.
What’s the matter with …?
<b>Answer</b>:
a. Minh has a toothache.
b. No, he doesn’t. The loudness of the drill
scares him.
c. Because he has a toothache.
d. She filled the cavity in her teeth.
e. f. Ss’ answer.
2. Listen and answer
Dr Lai’s job:………..
Dr Lai’s clothes……….
How do children feel?...
Dr Lai helps children:
explains…..
gives…..
tells……
reminds to clean……..eat….
<b>Answer</b><i>:</i>
a. Dr Lai is a dentist.
b. She wears a uniform to work.
d. She explains what will happen. She gives
them advice. She tells them how to look after
their teeth and she reminds them to clean their
teeth regularly and eat sensibly.
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
Teacher gives question to consolidate
1. What should we say to ask someone’s status of health?
2. Where should we go if we have a toothache?
3. How can the dentist do to fix our teeth?
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
- Learn vocabulary and expressions.
- Let’s think “what does the dentist advice after fixing your teeth?”
- Prepare B3,4 + KT 15’
………
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Developing skills of speaking, listening and reading to catch the content.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Simple future
- Simple present tense.
* Vocabulary:
- Surgery (n)
- forget (v)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Filling gaps.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Cassettes recorder + tape
- Worksheet
- Pictures
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1. Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2. Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>No checking</i>
<b>I/.Use the simple past tense of the verbs in the box</b>:<b>(7ms)</b>
1.I ……….TV last night<i>. </i>( watch)
2. Linh ……. ……… a skirt yesterday. (not, make)
3. My mother ………this shirt 10 years ago. (buy)
4. Mr. Wilson ……….an English teacher 5 years ago. (be)
5. Hong ………her friends yesterday. ( not, meet)
6. They ………..to Ho Chi Minh City a week ago. (go)
7. Nam ………his grandparents last summer vacation. ( visit)
<b>II/. Match (3ms )</b>
1. Go a. talked
2. Play b. was / were
3. Be c. took
4. Make d. played
5. Take e. made
6. talk f. went <i> </i>
<i>ANSWER KEY</i>
I/. 1,0 mark for each right answer
1. watched 2. didn’t make 3. bought 4. was
5. didn’t meet 6. went 7. visited
II/. 0.5 mark for each right answer
1. f 2. d 3. b 4.e 5. c 6. a
<i><b>3-New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
-Teacher uses the picture on page 104 to
introduce the situation.
-T asks to talk about what they know
about Minh (elicits: What’s the matter
with Minh? How does he feel before
going to see dentist? What is the dentist
doing?)
-Students talks
-Teacher gives students a talk: listen and
read to catch the main content of the
passage.
-Teacher asks to find if they are any new
word: preteach new word: surgery (say in
1st<sub> Lang); forget (using a situation)</sub>
-Students do as directed, read silently,
read him summary and fill in blanks with
the appropriate words.
3. Listen and read
*Warm up:
Teacher lets some students read their
completed text in front of the class.
Teacher corrects if there are any in
corrections and gives the key.
Teacher uses some questions to
consolidate how students can understand
the lesson.
1. What did Dr. Lai do to calm
Minh? (She smiled and said:
2. How is the cavity in her teeth?
3. What did Dr. Lai to do fix to?
- T explains the situation
-Teacher introduces structure of asking
and answering about cause: using a
situation: look at Minh: his tooth hurts.
Do you want to know the cause of his
toothache? You can ask “why” and
answers with “because”
- T says: Minh’s tooth hurts. Why?
(Because he has a cavity)
-Students observe the remaining pictures
and prepare the dialogue in pairs.
-Students practice in pairs with partners,
alternating the roles
-Some pairs practice in front of the class.
-Teacher corrects
<i> Now complete the story.</i>
<b>Answer</b>: Nervous; smiles; cavity; brush;
pleased.
4. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Use
the words to help you.
<i>Example</i>
<i>a) Minh’s tooth hurts.</i>
<i> Why?</i>
<i> Because he has a cavity.</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
<i>Remind ss what Dr Lai advice Minh</i>
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Describe what happened to you when you go to see a dentist in oral and in writing
- Do homework in your workbook
- Prepare Unit 11(A1)
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- How to ask and answer some information of health .
- Presenting listening skill.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>
- Review: would you + V …?
- The simple past tense (To be – regular and irregular verbs)
* Vocabulary:
(Adj) normal
(v) to fill – in, to measure, to weigh, to lease, to tell
(n) check – up, medical check – up, medical record, temperature, height, weight, scale (s)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role play
- Brainstorming
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Cassette recorder + tape
- Real objects
- Flashcard
- Picture (in Unit 10), picture (Unit 11, page 107)
- Picture of a scale (s)
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i> No checking
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T asks: Do you often do exercises
morning? Why should we do exercises
morning? (students answer)
-Teacher says: <i>yes, we should do exercises</i>
<i>to keep fit and stay healthy (let students</i>
<i>repeat and write on the board)</i>
( Use a picture of unit 11 page 107 to
introduce the situation of the dialogue)
- Teacher asks students some questions such
as:
Who are they? Where are they? What do
you think they are doing? - the ss are having<sub></sub>
a medical check –up.
*Warm up
(2’) * Brainstorming:
1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.
The ss had to fill in the medical
records( real object)
- T plays the cassette.
- T explains new word: look at “370<sub>C” and</sub>
guess the meaning of “take your
temperature”
*Do the same with the other words
- Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.
- T corrects ss’ pronunciation
- T says: <i>Now number the sentences. Use</i>
<i>the information given in the conversation</i>
<i>you’ve practiced, you put the following</i>
<i>sentences in the right order.(sticks the</i>
<i>flashcard on the board).</i>
- Pair work (numbering the sentences page
108)
- Some pairs perform before class.
- Teacher correct the exercises
- Let students read loudly the correct
number p.108 (pay attention to the ending
-medical check-up(n): buổi khám sức khỏe
-fill – in (gesture)
- medical record(n): phiếu khám sức khỏe
- take one’s temperature: đo nhiệt độ
- height(n)
- measure(v)
- weigh(v) - > weight(n)
-scales(n)
* 370<sub>C: Thirty – seven degree celsius['selsiəs]</sub>
(như centigrade)
* To make a polite request
Would you + V ……, please?
Now answer. Number the sentences.
Answer:
a-6 b-8 c-3 d-2 e-5 f-1 g-4 h-7
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
Ss read the sentences using these structures/ words: “Would you…….,
please?”/measure/weigh/take your temperature.
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
Prepare A2
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- How to ask and answer about the height and weight
-How to ask and answer some information about oneself and fill- in the medical record.
- Presenting speaking skill
- Presenting listening skill
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar: - How + Adjective …?
- WH Question: Which …? Where does he …?
What is his …? How ……… is he?
* Vocabulary:
- Full name, Forename, Surname, Male, Female
- review some regular and irregular verbs in past tense.
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role play
- Brainstorming
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Cassette recorder
- Flashcard
- Picture (unit 11 page 108 – Doctor with a stethoscope)
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i>Check students the past form of the verbs – vocabulary (using the flashcard)</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson (40’) </b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
* Questions – answers:
- T shows students a picture of doctor
with a stethoscope.
- T asks students: <i>Who’s he? What does </i>
['steθəskoup] ống nghe (để khám bệnh)
* Questions – answers:
*Warm up
(2’)
<b>2. Listen. Then write the missing words.</b>
-T shows students a pictures of A2 (page
108) and asks students some questions.
- T lets students read the dialogue and
predict the missing words for 2’
- T asks students if there are new words,
explains them
- Students listen to the tape (first time
and open their books)
- Ss listen the 2nd time and write the
missing words.
- Ss listen the 3rd<sub> time and check again</sub>
- Students compare their task with the
partner beside for 2’
- Students read loudly their task before
class (2 students)
- Ss listen to the tape and correct answer.
-T uses the real objects in class and
making the questions and answers with
How + Adj …?
- Pair work for 1’
-Students perform before class(3 pairs)
*Presentation
(5’)
*Practice
(15’)
<b>Answer: </b>
<i>Doctor:</i> …ask…How
<i>Doctor:</i> …your…50
<i>Hoa:</i> …shorter….me
<i>Doctor:</i> …tall
<i>Hoa:</i> …meter…centimeters
<i>Doctor:</i> …will…nurse…height
<i>Hoa:</i> …think
<i>Doctor:</i> No. …form
Further
(3’)
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
T gives some cues on the flashcard and asks students to make the questions and answers
with How + adj …?
+ How tall is he? He is …
+ How tall are you? I am …..
+ How high is the wall?
+How high are these buildings?
+ How heavy are you?
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- How to ask and answer some information about oneself and fill- in the medical record.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- WH Question: Which …? Where does he …?
What is his …? How ……… is he?
* Vocabulary:
- Full name
- Forename
- Surname
- Male
- Female
- review some regular and irregular verbs in past tense.
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role play
- Brainstorming
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Flashcard
- Pictures
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2-Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i> - Review: Game: fill in the missing words (using the flashcard) (2 groups of four)</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson (40’) </b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
* Brainstorming
- T shows students a thing in a box and
asks them to guess what it is?
-T asks students
<i>The thing we can write down it. What is </i>
<i>it?</i>
<i>- When we go to see the doctor. We must </i>
<i>have it (A medical record)</i>
<i>Today we learn the way to fill in it.</i>
* Questions – answers:
*Warm up
(2’)
3. Ask and answer questions with a
partner.
(picture of unit 11 page 11)
=> Hoa is standing at the Hong Ha school
- T asks students some questions about
Hoa in the order to teach them some new
words
e.g.: My full name is Le Thanh Nguyen
What’s her full name?
How heavy is he?
Or we can say: what is her weight?
Etc:…
- T asks students fill in the missing
information page 109
- Students work in pairs (ask and answer
about the missing information and fill in)
- Some pair perform before class
- Teacher corrects them
- T sticks a medical record on the board
- T asks a pair of students to go to the
board and play the role.
*Presentation
(10’)
*Practice
(8’)
*Further practice (3’)
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
- T asks students the way to ask about the weight.
+ How heavy are she/ he?
+ What is her weight?
+ Which class are she/ he in?
+ Which school do she/ he go to?
<i>Regular</i>
Call – called
Fill – filled
Measure –
measured
Start – started
Stop – stopped
Weigh – weighed
<i>Irregular</i>
Be-was/were
Give – gave
Have – had
Keep – kept
Leave – left
Take – took
- Lets students read loudly (twice) individually (2 students)
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
-Learn the vocabulary and remember
-Exercises: Group the right columns /t/ /d/ /Id/
called, filled, measured, visited, started, weighted, asked, stopped, looked, watcher, needed,
checked
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Asking and answering about health problems
- Being able to fill in the medical record
- Developing speaking, reading and writing skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- The past simple tense (review)
- Have + name of illness
* Vocabulary:
- Words relating to health and illness
<b>III. Techniques:</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role play
- Brainstorming
- Pair works
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>
- Cassette recorder + tape
- Pictures, realist
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
* Complete the sentences with the words given medical, records, temperature, scales, and
measure.
a. Your is 370
b. They filled in their medical ………..
c. ……… is an instrument for weighing people or things
d. The students are having a ……….. check up
e. Can you ……….. that door?
* Match the questions in A with the answers in B
A
a. What is his full name?
b. What is his age?
c. Which school does he go to?
d. Which class is he in?
e. Where does he live?
f. What is his height?
g. How heavy is he?
B
a. 12 Tran Hung Dao street
d. He is fourteen
e. Nguyen Van Hung
f. Class 7A
g. 1,50 meters
Week:5(24)
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teachers’ and students’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
* Brainstorming
Now tell me how to felt and what you did
when you were sick.
- Teacher writes student’s suggestions on
the board
e.g.:
* Questions – answers:
- Teacher introduces Mr. Tan – the
teacher and Lan (uses the picture on page
110)
<i>“This is Mr. Tan – the teacher and this is</i>
<i>Lan. Lan was absent yesterday”.</i>
<i>What do you think Mr. Tan is asking</i>
<i>Lan? (about her health …)</i>
<i>What was wrong with her?</i>
(she had a …)
- T says: We will listen to a dialog
between them. Try to check and compare
with the list you gave above while
listening and reading the dialog.
- Teacher checks students with some
questions:
+ Was Lan tired?
+ Did she go to see the doctor?
+ Did she take temperature?
+ Did she stay inside at recess?
+ Did she write sick note? (N)
-Teachers asks students if there are
difficult or new words, and explains them
if there are any.
(Headache – picture: sick note – readier;
- Students listen and repeat after the tape.
*Warm up
Feeling
+ tired
+ unhappy
+ sad
+ worried
……
What you did
+ see the doctor
+ stay in bed
+ take temperature
+stay inside at
recess
+ write sick note
+ take medicine
1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.
<i>*Presentation</i>
<i>*Practice</i>
<i>Controlled</i>
(class split in half to play 2 roles)
- Pair works (practicing the dialog. Read
questions – page 110 and try to answer
them)
- Some pair perform before the class
- Teacher’s correction
- T says: Now, we are going to listen to
the number of days lost thought sickness
in class 7A last semester. Try to guess the
numbers and write down.
- Students write downs the days lost they
guess.
- Students compare and check after the
first listening.
- Students listen to the tape again and
write the days lost for each sickness.
- Some students give the answers
- Teacher corrects pupil’s answers.
- Students ask and answer about the days
lost of them.
e.g.: What were your days lost due to?
How many days?
a. Because she had a bad cold
b. She had a headache
c. He tells her to stay inside at recess.
d. He said Lan had a virus
e. The doctor wrote it
<i>3. Listen . Then complete the table</i>
Cold: 10
Flu: 43
Stomachache : 37
Headache: 5
Toothache: 17
Total days lost: 112
<i>Further</i>
* Pair work
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
Teacher reminds ss of:
- Simple past tense (review)
- Asking about health problem.
- What was wrong with you?
- Saying illness
Have + name of illness
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Review all answers on your notebooks
- Write 5 or 7 sentences about your sickness
- Prepare B4
<b>B. WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (4)</b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking and describing simply about the names and the symptoms of some common
diseases.
- Being able to fill in the medical records.
- Developing speaking, reading and writing skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- The past simple tense (review)
- Everybody, nobody.
- Help do something
* Vocabulary:
- Words relating to diseases and symptoms.
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Pair works
- Retelling
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures.
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2-Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i><b>* Use the correct from or tense of verbs</b></i>
a. You should ……….. (go) to bed early.
b. My farther never ………..(take) medicine.
c. Lan …………..(be) very tired when she………..(catch) a bad cold two days ago.
d. He…………(not come) to the meeting last week .
e. There ……….(be) nobody there when I ………… (arrive) yesterday.
<i><b>* Make questions for the following answers:</b></i>
a. This street is five kilometers long. (How)
b. This lake is 5 meters in depth. (What)
c. The building is over 100 meters high. (What)
d. The blue dress is 120 thousand long. (How)
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- Teacher gives some pictures of sickness.
<i>4. Read. Then answer the questions</i>
<i>*Warm up</i>
Student says the name for each and writes
down on the board.
(cold, flu, toothache, headache,
stomachache …)
* Questions – answers:
- T elicits the topic and pre-teaching some
new words (symptoms, disappear, catch,
caught, sneeze)
<i>+ Did you ever hear about the common</i>
<i>cold?</i>
<i>+ We call this one common cold because</i>
<i>millions of people catch it every year. <b></b></i>
<i>catch.</i>
<i>+ When you have it. Do you cough or</i>
<i>sneeze like him? (show the picture) cough,<b></b></i>
<i>sneeze.</i>
<i>+ What do you do when you</i> have a cold?
(take medicine…)
<i>Task 1:</i> Students scan the text and find out
some symptoms of the common cold and
the way to prevent it.
- Students scan the text and do task one.
- Teacher teachers the words “disappear”
…
<i>Task 2:</i> Read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.
- Students compare their answer in pairs.
- Some pairs perform before the class.
Teacher gives the corrects answers
*Pre-reading
-Catch(v): mắc/nhiễm
-Symptom(n):
Sneeze(v): hắt hơi
Cough(v): ho
A running nose
A slight fever ['fi:və]: sốt nhẹ
-Disappear(v)
-Medicine(n) ['medsn; 'medisn]
-Prevent(v)
- cure(n) [kjuə] sự điều trị; đợt chữa bệnh
*While-reading
+ Symptoms:
A runny nose
A slight fever
Coughing
Sneezing
+ To prevent:
Eat well
Exercise
Keep fit
Stay healthy
<i>*Post- reading</i>
a. Why do we call the cold “common”?
<i> Because every year, millions of people catch it.</i>
<i><b></b></i>
b. What are the symptoms of the common cold?
<i> They are: a runny nose, a slight fever,</i>
<i><b></b></i>
<i>coughing and sneezing.</i>
<i> No, there isn’t.</i>
<i><b></b></i>
d. Do cold cures work? What do they do?
<i> No, there medicines don’t cure a cold, but they</i>
<i><b></b></i>
<i>relieve the symptoms.</i>
e. How can you help prevent a cold?
<i> By eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit and</i>
<i><b></b></i>
<i>staying healthy.</i>
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
Retelling about the common cold as the following suggested diagram:
- Students work in pairs
- Some students perform before the class.
<i><b>Remember </b></i>
There are some symptoms of a common cold: a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and
sneezing. Nobody knows a cure but some medicines relieve the symptoms. To prevent a cold
we should eat well, exercise, keep fit and stay healthy …
- Simple present tense (review)
- Help do something
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
- Rewrite what they retell about the common cold in student’s exercise notebooks.
- To get ready for unit 12, find and write the names of food they know in their notebooks.
- Review knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11.
………
<b>I. Objectives</b>
<i>Review students of:</i>
Simple past tense
Simple present tense
Present continuous tense
Week:6(25)
How much/ How many
Prepositions (of places)
Exclamatives
Structures: How heavy are you/ is he?/What is your weight?
How far is it from…to…?
How tall are you?
Why…?
Would you +V…?
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar: review
* Vocabulary: review
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures: option
<b>V. Procedures </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2 -Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
<i><b>No checking</b></i>
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
A. GRAMMAR
<b>I. Simple past tense</b>
The past simple tense: describe the actions that happened in the past.
* The adverbs to recognize the tense: ago, last (week, month,…), yesterday,…
<i><b>* Structures:</b></i>
+) affirmative: S + V2 /Ved
<i> * I/ She/ He + was</i>
<i> *We/ You/ They + were</i>
+) negative: S + didn’t + V (bare infinitive)
+) Interrogative: Did + S + V (bare infinitive)…?
<i>Answer: Yes, S + did/ No, S + didn’t</i>
<b>II. Simple present tense</b>
* Use to express: the truth, present habit.
* Adverbs: adverbs of frequency, every.
<i><b>* Structures:</b></i>
<i>1. Affirmative form:</i>
I /We/You/They + V.bare
He/She/It + V-s/ es
(Be) <sub></sub> Am, is, are
(Have) Have, has<sub></sub>
<i>2. Negative form: </i>
I /We/You/They + DO NOT(DON”T) + V.Bare.
He/She/It + DOES NOT(DOESN”T) + V.Bare.
<i>3. Interrogative form</i>:
DO / DOES + S + V.Bare?
* Write Be before the Subjects
<b>* WH-questions: </b>
WH-questions + DO / DOES + S + V. Bare?
<b>III. Present continuous tense</b>
* Structures:
<i><b>+/ S + is/ am/ are + Ving ……….</b></i>
<i><b>-/ S + isn’t/ aren’t / am not + Ving ……..</b></i>
<i><b>?/ Is/ Am/ Are + S + Ving……. …? </b></i>
-Now, at the moment, at present, at this time,
-Look, listen, be careful….
<b> IV. How much/ How many</b>
<i><b>1. How much:</b>bao nhiêu</i>
<i>a) Giá</i>
How much + is +singular noun?
How much +are + plural noun?
How much does + singular subject +cost?
How much do + plural subject + cost?
<i>b) Số lượng</i>
How much + uncountable noun…)
<i><b>2. How many: bao nhiêu</b></i>
How many + plural noun (countable)…?
<b>V. Prepositions (of places)</b>
Near, beside, opposite, to the right, between, …
<b>VI. Exclamatives </b>
<b> What + (a/an) + adj + Noun! </b>
<b>VII. Structures</b>
How heavy are you/ is he?/What is your weight?
How far is it from…to…?
How tall are you?
Why…?
Would you +V…?
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
<i>Ss do some exercies on workbook by themselves.</i>
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
Ss prepare the english test in 45 minutes.
<b>I. Objectives</b>
Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11.
o <i>Listening: Listen and complete the table. </i>
o <i>Reading: Read a passage about how to keep our teeth healthy. Then check the </i>
<i>statements if they are True(T) or False(F).</i>
<i>Writing: put the verbs in the right columns according to their final sounds.</i>
<b>II. Matrix</b>
Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vân dụng Tổng
TN TL TN TL TN TL
Listening 5 <sub>2.5</sub> 5 <sub>2.5</sub>
Reading 2
0.5
4
2.0
5
2.5
Language
focus
10
2.5
10
2.5
Writing 5 <sub>2.5</sub>5 <sub>2.5</sub>
Tổng 10
2.5
10
5.0
5
2.5
2.5
10
<b>III. Questions</b>
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS </b>
<i>Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence. (2.5m)</i>
1. Would you………me to the post office, please?
a. taking b. takes c. take d. took
2. Last month, Mr. Hung………..to Ho Chi Minh City for a trip.
a. go b. goes c. went d. going
3. What is your ………….., Lan? – I’m 45 kilos.
a. height b. weight c. tall d. name
4. …………..is this bag? – It’s 80,000 dong.
a. How much b. How many c. How old d. How heavy
5. Yesterday, I …………to school because I was sick.
a. goes b. didn’t go c. went d. go
6. My sister ….…………her teeth three times every day.
a. brush b. brushed c. brushes d. brushing
7. Did you buy any souvernirs in Nha Trang ? – No, I ……….
a. don’t b. won’t c. didn’t d. am not
8. I live ………..…Tran Van Thoi town with my grandmother.
a. on b. at c. between d. in
9. ………….…did Lan go to the dentist’s last week? – Because she had a bad toothache.
a. When b. Where c.What d. Why
10. Where …. ……..you last Monday ?
<b>II. READING</b>
<i>Read the passage carefully and answer the questions:</i>
Mai was born in Hai Phong , but now she lives in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She
went to Ha Noi two years ago. Now she studies at Quang Trung school. In her new school, she
has a lot of friends.
Yesterday was her thirteenth birthday. She had a small party with her friends.They ate a
lot of food and fruits<i>. </i>In the evening Mai had a stomachache, so her aunt very worried. She
took Mai to the hospital. The doctor said that Mai ate too much candy and fruit. Today Mai has
to stay at home.
<i><b>A/. True or false? (0.5 m)</b></i>
1……….. Mai was born in Hue.
2. ………..She had a stomachache in the evening.
<i><b>B/. Questions (2.0 m)</b></i>
1. Where was Mai born ?
...
2. Did Mai go to Ha Noi three years
ago ? ...
3. Which school does she go to now ?
………..
4. What did Mai and her friends eat
yesterday ? ...
...
<b>III. WRITING (2. 5 m)</b>
<i><b>Rewrite the passage , begin “ Yesterday,…” </b></i>
Today, Lan <i>has</i> a medical check-up. She <i>fills</i> in the medical record and <i>waits</i> in the
waiting room. After a few minutes, the nurse <i>calls</i> Lan’s name and <i>takes</i> Lan to the
doctor’office.
<b>Yesterday</b>,
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. LISTENING </b>
<i>Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m)</i>
<i> </i>Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) ……… old are you
Hoa: Fourteen.
Doctor: And your (2) ………..is one meter 50 centimeters?
Hoa: No, I think I’m (3)………. The nurse measure me
Doctor: Oh. How tall are you?
Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How (5) ……….are you?
Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilos.
Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilos.
ANSWER KEY:
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS </b>
<i>Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence. (2.5m)</i>
1. c 2. c 3. b 4. a 5. b
6. b 7. c 8. d 9. d 10. d
<b>II. READING</b>
<i><b>A/. True or false? (0.5 m)</b></i>
1. F 2.T
<i><b>B/. Questions (2.0 m)</b></i>
1. Mai was born in Hai Phong.
2. No, she didn’t.
3. Now she studies at Quang Trung school.
4. They ate a lot of food and fruits
<b>III. WRITING (2. 5 m)</b>
Yesterday, Hoa had a medical check-up. She filled in the medical record and waited in
the waiting room. After a few minutes, the nurse called Hoa’s name and took Hoa to the
doctor’office
<b>IV. LISTENING </b>
<i>Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m)</i>
Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) <i><b>How</b></i> old are you?
Hoa: Fourteen.
Doctor: And your (2) <i><b>height</b></i> is one meter 50 centimeters?
Hoa: No, I think I’m (3) <i><b>shorter</b></i>. The nurse measure me
Doctor: Oh. How tall are you?
Hoa: One meter (4) <i><b>45 </b></i>centimeters.
Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How (5) <i><b>heavy </b></i>are you?
Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilos.
<i><b>Homework</b></i>
Review Unit 9 to Unit 11.
<b>I. Objectives</b>
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to remember the knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11.
<b>II. Teaching aids</b>
Teaching plan, questions of the test.
<b>III. Procedures:</b>
<i>1- Greeting and taking the attendance.</i>
<i>2-Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking)</i>
<i>3- New lesson</i>
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds ss of the structures of:
simple present, present continuous and
simple past tense.
- T asks ss to redo the test.
- T corrects ss’ mistakes.
- T asks ss to read the text and check T
or F.
- Ss read the text and check.
- T gives the correct answers.
- T reminds ss of how to pronouce the
final sound ED
- Ss go to the board and complete the
table.
- T corrects.
ANSWER KEY:
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS </b>
<i>Choose the right word or phrase that best </i>
<i>completes the sentence. (2.5m)</i>
1. c 2. c 3. b 4. a
5. b 6. b 7. c 8. d
9. d 10. d
<b>II. READING</b>
<i><b>A/. True or false? (0.5 m)</b></i>
1. F 2.T
<i><b>B/. Questions (2.0 m)</b></i>
1. Mai was born in Hai Phong.
2. No, she didn’t.
3. Now she studies at Quang Trung school.
4. They ate a lot of food and fruits
<b>III. WRITING (2. 5 m)</b>
Yesterday , Hoa had a medical check-up.
She filled in the medical record and waited
in the waiting room. After a few minutes, the
nurse called Hoa’s name and took Hoa to the
doctor’office
<b>IV. LISTENING </b>
<i>Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m)</i>
- T plays the cassette.
- Ss listen and take note
- T asks some ss to give the answers.
- T corrects. Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) <i><b>How</b></i> old are you?
Hoa: Fourteen.
Doctor: And your (2) <i><b>height</b></i> is one meter
50 centimeters?
Hoa: No, I think I’m (3) <i><b>shorter</b></i>. The
nurse measure me
Doctor: Oh. How tall are you?
Hoa: One meter (4) <i><b>45 </b></i>centimeters.
Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your
height again. How (5) <i><b>heavy.</b></i>are you?
Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilos.
Doctor: No. It says on your form that
you’re 40 kilos.
<i><b>4-Consolidation:</b></i>
<i>Ss correct if necessary.</i>
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Prepare Unit 12( A1)
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about different food and expressing preferences.
- Developing speaking, reading and listening skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
<b>* Grammar:</b>
- I’d like (Review)
- Responses with so – too, either - neither
<b>* Vocabulary:</b>
- Words relating to foods.
<b>III. Techniques:</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role – pay
- Brainstorming
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures (enlarged from pictures in the textbook (page 114-115)
- Cassettes recorder + tape
- Real objects and artificial objects.
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b>
<b>2-</b><i><b> Review of the previous lesson: </b></i>(no checking<b>)</b>
<b>3- </b><i><b>New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T asks: <i>“Do you ever go to the market?”</i>
<i>What food do you buy or see at the</i>
market?”
- Ss: “-Meat, vegetable”
- T: <i>What food do you buy or see at the</i>
<i>market?</i>
- Ss: “-chicken, bean, beef”
-T explains the requirement and says:
<i>We’ll listen to a dialogue between Hoa</i>
<i>and her aunt and guess: What food they</i>
<i>bought at the market yesterday?</i>
- Students prepare to answer the questions
while listening and reading the dialogue.
- T plays the cassette.
- Ss check their guess.
- Teach new words by read objects.
- Students listen and repeat after the tape.
- Practice in pairs.
- T corrects ss’ pronunciation.
- T introduces new grammar note
- Teacher explains the situation and
teaches new words by read objects.
- Students listen and repeat after the tape.
- Practice in pairs.
- T corrects ss’ pronunciation.
- T introduces new grammar note
- Teacher explains the situation and
1. Listen and read. Then practice with a
partner.
*Warm up
Brainstorming:
(5’)
*Presentation
(5’)
<b>Paragraph 1</b>
- meat stall(n) quầy bán thịt
- chicken(n) ['t∫ikin]
- beef(n)
- pork(n)
*<i>Grammar note</i>:
So + auxiliary verbs + S (affirmative)
Neither + auxiliary verbs + S (negative)
<b>Paragraph 2</b>
- pea(n)
- carrot(n)
- spinach(n) ['spinidʒ]
- ’cucumber(n): quả dưa chuột
*<i>Grammar note</i>:
teaches new words by read objects.
- Students listen and repeat after the tape.
- Practice in pairs.
- T corrects ss’ pronunciation.
- T introduces new grammar note
- T asks ss to read the dialogues again and
write the list of food Lan and her aunt
bought at the market.
- Call on a student to read aloud the list of
the foods they bought.
- t gives the answers.
Further
- T asks the students to give expressions of
Hoa’s.
S + V(negative)/ Auxiliary(negative),
either
<b>Paragraph 3</b>
- papaya (n): [pə'paiə] đu đủ
- pineapple(n) ['painæpl] dứa
- smell(v)
- durian (n) ['dju:riən]: quả sầu riêng
*<i>Grammar note</i>:
Neither + auxiliary + S
<b>Answer</b>: beep spinach cucumbers
oranges
- Let’s…
- I’d like….
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
T asks ss to make sentences, using LET’S…and I’D LIKE…
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
- Prepare A2
I. <b>Objectives</b>
Talking about hobby using SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER
Developing speaking skill.
II. <b>Language contents</b>
<b>* Grammar:</b>
- Responses with so – too, either - neither
<b>* Vocabulary:</b>
- Words relating to foods.
<b>III. Techniques:</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Role – pay
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Real objects and artificial objects.
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Ss role –play the dialogues
Answer the questions: What did Lan and her aunt buy at the market yesterday?
(Beep, spinach, cucumbers, oranges)
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T explains the requirement
- T reminds ss of: SO, TOO, EITHER and
NEITHER
- T asks students model questions.
- Ss read the answers
- T asks ss to practice in groups of two,
using the structures with SO, TOO,
EITHER and NEITHER.
- Ss practice in groups of two, using the
structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and
NEITHER.
- T calls some pairs to perform before
class.
- Ss work in pairs.
- T corrects
- T asks ss to practice more using the
structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and
NEITHER. (free)
2. Ask and answer questions with a
partner. Talk about the food you like.
Further
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
T reminds ss of the structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
-Prepare A3,4
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Asking about what students ate and drank yesterday.
- Developing writing skill.
- Students can use past simple tense with irregular verbs.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Simple past tense (Review)
* New words:
Slice(v), green pepper(n), onion(n), boil(v), add(v), heat(v), salt(n), taste(v), pan(n), stir-fry(v),
soy sauce(n), chopstick(n), spoon(n),
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures – worksheets
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students practice, using SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER
Teacher writes these sentences on the board:
I like oranges.
Minh got a good mark yesterday.
Linh has many books
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T asks ss to look at the pictures on page
116 and guess the content of the text.
- T introduces the situation.
- T asks ss some questions before doing
the task.
<i>Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner that evening.</i>
<i>Read and find out the answers to the</i>
<i>questions: “What did she cook? How did</i>
<i>she prepare the food? What did Hoa do?</i>
- T asks ss to read the text silently to
answer those questions.
- Ss read the text silently to answer those
3. Read. Then answer the questions.
Week:8(27)
questions.
- T calls some ss to answer the questions.
- T asks ss to read the text.
- T explains new words
- T asks ss to read the question (part a))
and answer it.
- Ss read the question.
- T calls student to write the menu on the
board.
- Student writes the menu on the board.
- T asks ss to complete the instructions.
- T asks ss to match the instructions to the
pictures(page 117)
- T calls ss to check the answers.
- T corrects.
- T explains the requirement
- T asks ss to write what they ate and
drank yesterday
- Ss to write what they ate and drank
yesterday
- T asks ss to compare the answer with
their partner.
- Ss compare the answer with their
partner.
- slice(v)
- green pepper(n)
- onion(n)
-boil(v)
-add(v)
-heat(v)
-salt(n)
-taste(v) [teist]
-pan(n)
-stir-fry(v)
- soy sauce(n)
-chopstick(n)
-spoon(n)
<i>Answer:</i>
a)Menu
-Cucumber salad with onions
-Boiled spinach
-Stir-fried beef peppers and onions
-Rice
b)+Add the missing verbs:
1. Slice 2. Slice 3. Heat
4. Stir-fry 5. Add 6. Boil
7. Add
+Matching the instructions to the
pictures:
1. c 2. f 3.a
4. d 5. b 6. e
7. g
- T calls one or two student(s) to read (or
write) the sentences.
- T corrects.
<i><b>4-Consolidation:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to write their own menu about things they ate yesterday.
- Ask Ss to write at home
Eg: Yesterday for breakfast I drank milk, ate bread ...
For breakfast I ate ...
For lunch I ate ...
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
-Prepare B1.
<b>- Finish their own menu.</b>
<b>- Learn new words in by heart.</b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about the habit of keeping healthy.
-Student can choose healthy drinks and food
- Developing listening skill
<b>II. Language contents</b>
<i>Grammar:</i>
+ Simple past tense
+ Conjunction: but Review
+ Make
<i><b>Menu</b></i>
1. Breakfast : milk, bread ....
2. Lunch : ....
3. Dinner : ....
4. Supper : ...
<i>Vocabulary</i>: dirt (n)
<b>III. Techniques</b>
Role-play
Questions-answer
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
Cassette, picture
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2 - Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the text on page 116
Write new words: Slice(v), green pepper(n), onion(n), boil(v), add(v), heat(v), salt(n),
taste(v), pan(n), stir-fry(v), soy sauce(n), chopstick(n), spoon(n),
<i><b>3-. New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T asks ss to look at the picture and
explain it.
- Ss look at the picture and explain it.
- T asks: where is Ba? Can you guess
what’s wrong with him?
- T play the cassette.
- T asks ss to answer the questions above.
- T plays the cassette again (repeat if
necessary)
- T explains new word
- T asks ss to perform the dialogue.
- ss perform the dialogue.
- T asks ss to read the dialogue silently
and then summary it.
- Ss read the dialogue silently and then
- T asks ss to compare the answer with a
partner.
- T calls one or two student(s) to read the
complete story.
- T corrects
<b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner</b>
-dirt(n)
<i><b>Answer:</b></i>
1.doctor 2.sick 3.asked 4.had
5.spinach 6.wash 7.more carefully
8.Vegetables 9.make 10.She
11.medicine
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
Remind ss of the content of the dialogue – link to the fact
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Talking about diet
- Developing listening, reading and writing
- Students know how to eat diet
- Name of some healthful foods and drinks.
- Students grapes the affirmative and negative form of simple past tense and conjunction
“but”.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
- Must, should (Review)
- Command (Review)
- The affirmative and negative form of simple past tense
* Vocabulary:
Balanced (adj)
Moderate (adj)
Diet (n)
Body – building foods
Energy – giving foods
<b>III. Techniques</b>
- Questions - Answers
- Story – telling
- Role play
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Cassette recorder + tape
- Pictures
– Worksheets
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<b>1-</b><i><b>Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<b>2- </b><i><b>Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
No checking
<b>3- </b><i><b>New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
- T asks students some questions about the
kind of foods they would like to eat
<i>Ex: </i>
<i>What food would you like to eat?</i>
*Warm – up
(5’)
<b>2.Listen and read. Then answer the</b>
<b>questions</b>.
<i>*Pre-reading</i>
<i>Do you like vegetables?</i>
<i>I like fish. And you?</i>
<i>- Eliciting the topic</i> and teaching new
words
- T has students listen to the tape once or
twice.
-T has students read the passage to
themselves.
-T calls on one or two students to read the
passage aloud to the class.
-T has students read over questions a) -
-T asks student to find the answers to the
questions.
-T has students compare their answers with
their partners.
-T calls on some students to give the
answers in front of the class.
* Make any necessary corrections
-T has students study the pictures for a few
minutes and answers the questions.
- What’s this?
- Are they vegetable?
-T has students listen to the tape once or
twice.
-T has students listen to the tape again and
write the letters or Lan, Nga, Ba and Hoa
ate and drank.
-Teacher plays the tape
(the 2nd<sub> time books opened)</sub>
- T calls ss to give the answers.
- T corrects.
(10’)
<i>*While-reading</i>
<i>(15’)</i>
-balance diet(n)
-unhealthy food
-moderate ['mɔdərit] (a) vừa phải
-amount(n) số/ khối lượng
-body- building food(n) thức ăn giúp
phát triển cơ bắp
-energy (n)
-fatty food(n): thức ăn giàu chất béo
-dairy ['deəri] products: sản phẩm bơ
sũa
-cereal ['siəriəl](n): ngũ cốc
-‘Lifestyle(n) lối sống
Answer:
<b>4. Listen and write the letters of what</b>
<b>they ate and drank</b>
<i><b>Answer:</b></i>
TAPE TRANSCRIPTION
<i>For her lunch, Lan had beef with noodles and vegetables. She had juice too. Ba chose fish and</i>
<i>rice and some fruit. He drank some water. Nga ate rice and vegetables and drank juice. He</i>
<i>had noodles and some fruit. She had juice, too.</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
Remind ss of a balance diet and the benefit of eating sugar.
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
Prepare Language focus 4.
Do exercise 4 – page 79 English exercise book.
………
………
………
………
………
]
Singnature:
<b>I. Objectives</b>
- Revision helps the students to consolidate what they have learnt from Unit 10 to unit
12
- Developing listening, speaking, reading and writing skills.
<b>II. Language contents</b>
* Grammar:
1. Past simple tense
2. Indefinite quantifiers.
3. Too and either
4. So and neither
5. Imperatives
<b>III. Techniques</b>
1. Questions - Answers
2. Gap filling
3. Role play
4. Guessing information.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>
- Pictures, colored chalks.
<b>V. Procedures</b>
<i><b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Teacher asks Ss to talk about their food.
<i><b>3-New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
Teacher guides Ss to review the grammar
notes from Units 10, 11, 12.
T: Review simple past tense
- T has Ss look at the pictures in the
*Warm up
<b>1. Past simple tense</b>
<i>a- Affirmative form:</i>
I went to Dam Sen Park last Sunday
She watched TV yesterday evening.
<i>b- Negative form:</i>
I didn’t go to Dam Sen Park last Sunday.
She didn’t watch TV yesterday evening.
<i>c- Interrogative form:</i>
Did she watch TV yesterday evening?
textbook, guess the actions and then
answer the questions in pairs.
- T asks some pairs to practice in front of
the class and correct and them.
- T reviews some indefinite quantifiers.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page
124 to write the correct expression and
correct them.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page
125 to complete the dialogues.
- T asks some pairs to read the dialogues
and correct them.
- T reviews TOO and EITHER
- T asks Ss to work in pairs to read the
- T has Ss look at the pictures on page
126 to make up similar dialogues with a
partner.
- T gives some feedback.
- T reviews SO and EITHER
- T asks Ss to work in pairs to read the
dialogues.
- T has Ss look at the pictures on page
126 again to make up 8 dialogues with a
partner.
- T gives some feedback.
- T reviews imperatives.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page
128 and complete the instructions.
- T asks some Ss to read the instructions
and correct them.
b. No, I didn’t. I had dinner in a
restaurant.
c. No, I didn’t. I went to the movie
d. No, I didn’t. I read a book on the
weekend.
e. No, I didn’t. I played football
yesterday.
<b>2. Indefinite quantifiers</b>
a) Write the correct expression
B. a lot of tea C. a little sugar
D. a lot of salt E. too much coffee
b) Complete the dialogues
A. A little…a lot
…a little…
B. a lot of
C. too much
D. a little
<b>3. </b><i><b> </b><b>Too</b></i><b> and </b><i><b> either</b></i>
<i>a) Work with a partner. Read the</i>
<i>dialogues</i>
Students’ practice
<i>b) Look at the pictures. Make up similar</i>
<i>dialogues with a partner.</i>
Students’ practice
<b>4. </b><i><b> </b><b>So</b></i><b> and</b><i><b> neither</b></i>
Students’ practice
<b>5. Imparatives</b>
Complete the instructions
<i><b>Answer</b></i>:
<i><b>4- Consolidation</b></i>
- T: Have Ss give some regular verbs and make some sentences using them.
- T: Have Ss to write the structures of TOO, EITHER, SO and NEITHER.
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
Prepare Unit 13 A1
<b> </b>
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b>
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe sporting activities and pastimes. T
introduces the topic & gives practice in listening & reading, asking & answering questions
about sports
*<b>Education</b>: do exercise
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b>. <b>Language contents</b>
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: words relating to sports
* <b>Grammar</b> : simple past & simple present
<b>III.Techniques</b>
Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>:
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures:</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
No checking
<i><b>3- New lesson:</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<i><b>* Warm up: chatting (5’)</b></i>
- T asks ss some questions
- Sts give feedback
- Lead into the new lesson
<b>A1/ </b>( 30')
<i><b>* Warm up: chatting</b></i>
<i>+ What are your favorite sports?</i>
<i>+ When do you always play these sports ?</i>
+ <i>Which sports do you like best ?</i>
<i>+ Make a list of the sports which you play in</i>
<i>your free time.</i>
<i><b>A1/ Listen and read. Then answer the</b></i>
* T asks ss:
<i>-</i> T calls on some ss to identify the
sports in the pictures
<b>+ </b><i>Who can play one of the sports in</i>
<i>the picture?</i>
<i>- </i>T introduces the content of the text,
sets the task
* T has ss listen to the tape twice.
- Ss read the passage to themselves to
find the answers
- Ss name the sports in the lesson,
using the pictures
- T corrects some errors
<i>+ Do you play any of the ten sports</i>
<i>that are popular in the USA?</i>
<i>- </i>Ss ask and answer the question in
pairs
- public pairs & corrections
* T asks ss
+<i> Which sports are the most popular</i>
<i>in Vietnam?</i>
<i>+ Is baseball your favorite sports?</i>
<i> If not, what is your first choice?</i>
<i><b>questions</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
<i>- roller-skating(n) trượt patanh( sd giầy có</i>
<i>bánh xe ở 4 góc)</i>
<i>- roller-blading (n) trượt patanh (giấy có bành</i>
<i>xe nằm dọc dưới đế giầy.</i>
<i>- American football(n) bóng bầu dục</i>
<i>- baseball (n) bóng chày</i>
<i>- skateboarding(n) trượt ván</i>
<i>- basket ball(n) bóng rổ</i>
<i>* Sentence:</i>
<i>- Which sport do you like best ?</i>
<i>- What sports do you like ?</i>
<i>Questions:</i>
<i>a,b: Students’ answer</i>
<i>(a/ Yes, I do./ No, I don't. My favorite sport is</i>
<i>table tennis / I like badminton best.</i>
<i>b/ Yes, I do./ No, I don't.)</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation (8’)</b></i>
* True or False ?
1/ Teenagers in the USA like baseball best.
2/ Baseball is the most popular game in the world.
3/ Many teenagers don't like table tennis.
* 1 T, 2 F, 3 F
+T reminds ss of the notes above and gives the homework.
<i><b>5- Homework: ( 2' ) </b></i>
-Learn the remember by heart.
- Write A2 at home
-Prepare A3
<b> </b>
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b> :
T gives practice in using adjectives & adverbs & in reading for comprehension about sports
*<b>Education</b>: hard-working
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b>.<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: words relating to sports
* <b>Grammar</b> : adjectives & adverbs
<b>III.Techniques</b>:
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>:
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures:</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the text
- Answer the questions: What kind of sport do many American teenagers like?
(they like table tennis)
-Write new words: skateboarding, roller-skating, basketball, baseball
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<i><b>* Warm up: (5’)</b></i>
- T sets the task
- Ss : tell some most popular sports
-Ss: say
-T: lead in
<b>A3/ </b>(35')
* T : elicit the target language
-Ss: look at the picture, name the
sports.
-Ss: read the sentences silently
- Ss listen to the sentences twice &
highlight the key words ( e.g. good
player, plays well )
_T: pre-teach some vocabulary
* Ss work in pairs, using the pictures
+<i> St1: good</i>
<i>+St2: He's a good player.</i>
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
<i> </i><b>some most popular sports </b>
- soccer
- football
- tennis
- badminton
- <i><b>A3/ Listen. Then practice with a partner</b></i>
<i><b> 1/</b></i> Vocabulary:
- player(n) cầu thủ
- swimmer(n) vận động viên bơi lội
- runner(n) vận động viên chạy đua
- cyclist (n) người đi xe đạp
<i>+St1: well</i>
<i>+St2: He plays football well.</i>
<i>*</i> public pairs & corrections
<i>- quick - quickly</i>
<i>- safe – safely</i>
<i><b>Ad+ ly =Adv of manner</b></i>
<i>* A good player</i>
<i>- play well</i>
<i><b>4-Consolidation</b></i>
- T reminds ss of the notes above
<i><b>5-Homework</b></i>
-Learn your lesson.
- Do A1 - A4 / 82, 83 - workbook
- Prepare Unit 13(A4,5)
………
………
………
………
………
Week 28
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b>:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe sporting activities and pastimes. T gives
practice in forming adverbs and pronunciation and intonation.
*<b>Education</b>: keep healthy
*<b>Skills</b> : reading comprehension & speaking
<b>II</b> .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: words relating to sports
* <b>Grammar</b>: adjectives & adverbs of manner
<b>III.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
Singnature:
<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>:
pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V .Procedures: </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
Ss read the sentences and write new words: skillful (A3)
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
- T asks ss some questions:
<i>+ What is your favorite sport?</i>
<i>+ What kind of sport do you usually</i>
<i>play in your free time?</i>
- T introduce new lesson
<b>A4/ </b>( 20')
* T shows the pictures
+<i> What are they doing?</i>
<i>+ Do you always take a walk ?</i>
<i>+ Who often take a walk in your family?</i>
<i>+ What are the advantages of walking? </i>
<i>+ What sports activity does the writer</i>
<i>take part in ?</i>
<i>+ What is WFF ?</i>
<i>- </i>Ss read the passage to themselves, find
the answers
- public answers & corrections
- T asks ss some more questions,
explains some words
- Translate the text into Vietnam
(option)
* Real situations
<i>+ What sport is it in the picture?</i>
<i>( swimming)</i>
<i>+ Do you like swimming? ( yes/ No )</i>
<i>+ Where can we go swimming?</i>
-T: lead in
<i><b>(2-5’)</b></i>
<i><b>A4/ Read. Then answer the questions</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
<i>- competition</i>
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>a/ He takes part in Walking For Fun club /</i>
<i>walking.</i>
<i>b/ The writer's school team won the first</i>
<i>prize, they were so happy and wanted to</i>
<i>keep the activities.</i>
<i>c/ One activity is a 5 km walk / walking 5</i>
<i>km to the beach on Sunday morning, and</i>
<i>the other is walk- to- school day.</i>
<i>d/ It's 5 km from school to the beach.</i>
<i>e/ Wednesday is the WTS day</i>
<i>f/ Members living near school often take</i>
<i>part in the WTS day.</i>
-T: check ss’ memories
+<i> You're going to read a passage about</i>
<i>safety awareness in the swimming pool</i>
<i>or on the beach. You read and find the</i>
<i>main idea of the passage</i>
<i>* </i>Ss read the text & find what the main
- T gives ss the new vocabulary in the
lesson
<i>- </i>T reviews Adverbs of manner (Am
- T sets the task
+<i> read again and change the adjectives</i>
<i>in brackets to adverbs</i>
<i>-</i> Ss read the text & do the exercise
- cross check
- public answers & corrections
- T gives the correct keys
- T asks
+<i> What do you think about the position</i>
<i>of the adverbs you have done ?( V + Am</i>
<i>/ Am + V )</i>
<i>- </i>Ss read the complete passage aloud
- translate some sentences into
Vietnamese
* T asks ss some questions
+ <i>Do you know the places where we can</i>
<i>swim?</i>
<i><b> -T: educate ss</b></i>
<i>- </i>Ss work in groups of 6 to tell about
water safety awareness
- public groups & corrections
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
<i>+ awareness (n) ý thức</i>
<i> be aware of : ý thức về</i>
<i>+ aim(n) mục tiêu</i>
<i>+ l lifeguard(n) người cứu hộ</i>
<i>+pool edge (n) thành hồ</i>
<i>+ obey(v) tuân theo, vâng lời</i>
<i>- careless (a)không cần thận</i>
<i> * Key</i>
<i>- clear - clearly</i>
<i>- careful - carefully</i>
<i>- safe - safely</i>
<i>- careless - carelessly</i>
<i>- strict - strictly</i>
<i><b>4-Consolidation:</b></i> ( 2')
- <i>T reminds ss of the the adverbs of manner</i>
<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make an invitation & refuse/ accept to an
invitation.
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b>.<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about sports
* <b>Grammar</b> : modal verbs: can, must, should, ought to
III<b>.TECHNIQUES:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
IV<b>. TEACHING AIDS</b>:
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.PROCEDURES: </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Ss read the text and write new words: <i>obey, aim, edge, lifeguard</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacherand Ss’activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>( 5’)
- T sets the task
- Ss: work in groups and play “ Find
s.o who…”
-Ss: go to the board and read their
result aloud
- T: feed back
-T: lead in
<b>B1/ </b>(20')
* T lets ss look at the pictures & asks
ss what Ba & Nam are doing
( They are playing table tennis)
- T introduces the content of the
dialogue
* Ss listen to the dialogue twice,
following the dialogue
- Ss practice the dialogue in pairs,
changing roles
- public pairs & corrections
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
Find s.o who…. Name
- Can play soccer well
- Can run quickly
- Can play volleyball skillfully
- Can’t swim
- Can’t play table tennis well.
<i><b>B1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner:</b></i>
<i>- modal verbs: should, ought to, must</i>
<i>- paddle (n): vợt bóng bàn</i>
<i>- It takes s.o time to do s.th: mất bao nhiêu thời</i>
<i>gian để làm gì</i>
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>a/ Nam must / should finish his homework before</i>
<i>he plays table tennis.</i>
<i>b/ Nam will be ready in a few minutes.</i>
<i>c/ Ba will finish a question for Math.</i>
<i>d/ Ba has two paddles.</i>
- Ss read through the dialogue to find
the answers (a) - What does Ba have to
do for tomorrow work?
- T explains the modal verbs ( can,
must, should, ought to, have to )
- Ss find the answers b, c, d in pairs
* public pairs & corrections
- writing as homework
<b>B2/ </b>( 15')
* Ss listen to the model dialogue twice
- T explains the task
- T makes a model (a) : T - st , st - st
* pair- work & changing roles
- public pairs & corrections
* Ss make their own dialogues in pairs
- public pairs & corrections
<i><b>MODALS:</b></i>
<i> must, have to, ought to, should, can, may….</i>
<i>-should / ought to → give advice</i>
<i>-Have to / must → give an obligation</i>
<i>-Can/ may → show an ability</i>
<i>* Would you like to….</i>
<i>- I’d love to, but I can.</i>
<i><b>B2/ Listen. Then practice with a partner. Change</b></i>
<i><b>the underlined details using the information in</b></i>
<i><b>the box</b></i>
<i>* Come and play basket ball</i>
<i>- I'm sorry. I don't think I can.</i>
<i>- I should clean my room.</i>
<i>* Would you like to play table tennis?</i>
<i>- I'd like to, but I can't.</i>
<i>a/ A: Come and play volleyball, B ?</i>
<i>B: Well, I should visit my grandmother.</i>
<i>A: Can you play on the weekend?</i>
<i> ...</i>
<i>A: See you on Saturday afternoon. </i>
<i>* Now make your own dialogues</i>
<i>- I must practice my music lesson</i>
<i>- I ought to help my Mom.</i>
<i>- I should wash my clothes.</i>
<b>4- </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b> ( 2')
- <i>T reminds sts of the notes above</i>
<b>5- </b><i><b>Homework</b></i><b>:</b> ( 3' )
<i>-Learn your lesson.</i>
<i> - Do B1/ 83 - workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare B3 and the 15 minute - test </i>
<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>:
T gives practice in reading comprehension about scuba-diving & practice using modal verbs,
intonation of the poem.
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
Week:10(29)
*<b>Skills</b> : reading comprehension
listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b> .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about scuba-diving
* <b>Grammar</b>: modal verbs: can, must, should, ought to
III<b>.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
IV<b>. Teaching aids</b>
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<i><b>1-Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
No checking
<b>THE SECOND ENGLISH TEST</b>
Time: 15 minutes
<b>Adjectives</b> <b>Adverbs</b>
1. good a. slowly
2. bad b. badly
3. slow c. well
4. sudden d. suddenly
5. skillful e. interestingly
6. interesting f. skillfully
<i><b>II. Complete the sentences without changing the meaning.(7ms)</b></i>
1. Minh’s brother is a good swimmer. He swims ………
2. Tuan is a slow tennis player. He plays tennis……..………..
3. I’m a very bad badminton player. I play badminton….………….
4. She drives ……….She is a safe driver.
5. My aunt is a skillful table tennis. She plays table tennis ………
6. Mr. Minh drives his car carefully. He is a ……… driver.
7. She is a fast runner. She runs ……….…
* <i>ANSWERS</i>:
I..(3ms)
0.5 for each right answer
1. c 2. b 3. a
4. d 5.f 6.e
II. Complete the sentences. Use the adjectives or adverbs in bracket.(7ms)
1. well 2. slowly 3. very badly
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>(5’)
- T ask ss to role play s1-s2
“ Invite your friend to play volleyball .
But your friend refuses”
- Sts do this task in pairs
- public pairs & corrections
* T: - Do you like sports?
- What sports do you like best?
-T: elicit the new lesson
<b>B3/ </b>( 20')
* T has sts look at the picture, guessing
+ <i>Do you know this sport ?</i>
<i>+ Where can you see people play this</i>
<i>kind of sport ?</i>
<i>+ What do you need in order to scuba</i>
<i>dive ? ( special breathing equipment )</i>
<i>Ss: answer</i>
<i>- T: teach the vocabulary</i>
<i>-Drill pronunciation</i>
<i>- T: write –Ss: copy down</i>
<i>-T: check vocabulary</i>
<i>*</i> Sts work in groups of 6 to do T /F
- public answers & corrections
* correcting the false sentences
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
<i>S1: Come and play volleyball.</i>
<i>S2: I’m sorry. I don’t think I can.</i>
<i><b>Sports</b></i>
<i><b>B3/ Read. Then answer the questions</b></i>
<i><b>* Vocabulary:</b></i>
<i>- special breathing equipment</i>
<i>- invention (n): sự phát minh</i>
<i>- scuba- diving: mơn lặn có bình dưỡng khí</i>
<i>- deep sea: sâu dưới đáy biển</i>
<i>- diving vessel: tàu ngầm</i>
<i>- explore (v): thám hiểm, khám phá</i>
<i>* Questions:</i>
<i>True or False ?</i>
<i>1F, 2T, 3F, 4F, 5T</i>
<i>* Corrections:</i>
<i>a/ Most of the world's surface is water (F)</i>
<i>b/ T</i>
<i>c/ Now, scuba-diving is a popular sport</i>
<i>because people can swim freely in the water</i>
<i>with the help of special breathing equipments</i>
<i>(F)</i>
<i>d/ Jacques Cousteau invented a deep-sea</i>
<i>diving vessel (F) / Scuba-diving became / was</i>
<i>a popular sport then.</i>
<i>e/ T</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation: </b></i>
- Retell the content of the text.
<i>-Learn your lesson. </i>
<i> - Do B - workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare A1 - unit 14 (talk about free time activities, make the reply to invitations,</i>
<i>make inquiries about & express preferences.)</i>
………
………
………
………
………
Week 29
<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives</b>:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to talk about free time activities, make the reply
to invitations, make inquiries about & express preferences.
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b> .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about free time fun
* <b>Grammar</b> : like & prefer + to-infinitive / gerund
prepositions & expressions of time
<b>III.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>
Singnature:
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<b>1- </b><i><b>Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<b>2-</b><i><b> Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
No checking
<b>3-</b><i><b>New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
* <b>Warm up</b>: (5’)
- T: ask some questions
+ What do you usually do in the evening?
+ How often do you watch TV?
+ What time do you watch TV?
+ At home? Somewhere else?
+ What is your favorite program?
-T: lead in
<b>A1/ </b>
* ( 5') T asks ss:
<i>- </i>T has ss look at the listing & guess
where it is from
<i>- </i>T has ss look at the picture & guess what
Hoa's family is doing
- T introduces the content of the dialogue
+<i>Hoa & Lan are talking about what they</i>
<i>often do in the evening</i>
<i>- </i>T has ss predict what they often do
* ( 20') Sts read the dialogue while
- T asks ss some questions
<b>+ Does Hoa’s family like to watch TV?</b>
<b>+</b><i><b> What do they do?</b></i>
<i><b>+</b><b>Does Hoa like to play chess ?</b></i>
<i><b>+ Does Lan prefer to watch T.V ?</b></i>
<i>- </i>T introduces the structures
- Sts repeat the dialogue, then play the
roles in pairs
- public pairs & corrections
- Sts read through the dialogue & do the
multiple choice individually
- cross check
- public answers & corrections
- writing the answers in full sentences as
homework
* (10') Discuss : <i><b>What do you prefer / like</b></i>
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
- I do my homework.
- I sometimes watch TV.
- At 5 pm.
- movies/ music/ sports
<i><b>A1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
<i>- cricket (n): con dế</i>
<i>- adventure (n): cuộc phiêu luu</i>
<i>* Structures:</i>
<i><b> prefer + to- infinitive / gerund</b></i>
<i>EX: They prefer to do other things.</i>
<i> I prefer walking to cycling.</i>
<i>- like + to- infinitive / gerund</i>
<i>EX: I like listening to music late at night.</i>
<i> to listen</i>
<i><b>to do in the evening ? ( in pairs )</b></i>
- guiding A1 / 87- workbook <i>* Discuss:What do you like to do in the evening ?</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation:</b></i> ( 2')
- <i>T reminds ss of the structures above</i>
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>: ( 3' )
<i>-Learn your lesson.</i>
<i> </i> <i> - Do A1/ 87 - workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare A2 - unit 14 </i>
<i><b> </b></i>
<b> </b>
<b> I. Objectives</b>:
T gives practice in making suggestions & talking about free time activities
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b> .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about free time fun
* <b>Grammar</b> : Would you like to...?, Let's... , What about...?, Can you make it on...?
<b>III.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>
pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b>
<b>2-</b><i><b> Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the dialogue (A1)
Answer the questions:
What does Lan invite Hoa to do? (eat dinner with her family)
Why doesn’t Hoa’s family have a TV? (Her aunt and her uncle don’t like watching TV)
<b>3- </b><i><b>New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>(5’)
* Ss have 3 minutes to write sentences ,
using LIKE/ PREFER
(two teams)
-The team which write more sentences is
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
<i>EX : </i>
<i>- I like listening to music. </i>
<i>- I don't like watching T.V.</i>
<i>- I prefer watching cartoons.</i>
winner
<b>A2/ </b>( 35’)
* T has ss look at the picture & talk in
pairs about what they (don't) like to do in
their free time
- T presents the content of the dialogue
* Sts listen to the dialogue
- practicing the dialogue in pairs,
changing the roles
- T calls ss ' attention to the structures of
the lesson
- T has ss make up similar conversations
in pairs ( ss make their schedules, T
makes mapped dialogue )
- public pairs & corrections
<i><b>A2/ Listen and read. Then practice with</b></i>
<i><b>a partner</b></i>
* Note:
- Would you like to...?
+ That sounds good.
- What would you like to...?
- Can you make it on...?
- How about...?
- What about...?
+ No. Sorry.
+ That's OK.
- cowboy (n): cao bồi
- detective (n): thám tử
<i>* Make up a similar conversation</i>
<i>A: Would you like to go to the theater this</i>
<i>week ?</i>
<i>B: That sounds great. What would you</i>
<i>like to see ?</i>
<i>A: There is a play on at the Youth</i>
<i><b>theater.</b></i>
<i>B: OK. Can you make it on Monday</i>
<i>night?</i>
<i>A: Sorry. The theater doesn't open on</i>
<i>Monday nights. How about Wednesday ?</i>
<i>B: I'm sorry I think I can't. I'm going to</i>
<i>learn for my English test. What about</i>
<i><b>Saturday ?Are you free that day ?</b></i>
<i>A: Yes, I am. Let's go on Saturday.</i>
<b>4-Consolidation</b>: ( 2')
- <i>T reminds ss of the structures above</i>
<b>5- Homework:</b> ( 3' )
<i>-Learn your lesson.</i>
<i> - Do A2, A3/ 88, 89 - workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare A3, A4 - unit 14 (talk about some programs on TV) </i>
<i> </i>
<b>I. Objectives</b>:
T gives practice in reading for comprehension & in pronunciation & intonation, about
T.V & T.V programs
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skills</b> : speaking & reading
<b>II</b> .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: talk about T.V & T.V programs
* <b>Grammar</b> : simple past
<b>III.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>
pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<b>1- </b><i><b>Greeting and checking the attendance</b></i>
<b>2-</b><i><b> Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Read dialogue
<b>3- </b><i><b>New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>(5’)
* T: ask a question:
What do you often do in your free
time?
-Ss: answer by writing on the board
( two teams)
- T: check and correct
<b>A3/ </b>( 35')
* T asks ss some questions to lead in
the lesson
<i>+ Do you like watching T.V ?</i>
<i>+ Do you have TV set at home ?</i>
<i>+ What about your neighbor ?</i>
<i>+ What about ten years ago ? 30 years</i>
<i>ago ?</i>
<i>+ Was T.V a popular thing 30 years</i>
<i>ago ?</i>
<i>+ What happened ?</i>
<i>- </i>T introduces the content of the text
* Ss read the text silently
- T elicits & explains the new words
- Ss work individually, filling the
missing words
- cross check, writing their answers on
<i><b>* Warm up:</b></i>
<i>* Free time</i>
<i></i>
<i></i>
<i></i>
<i></i>
<i></i>
<i></i>
<i><b>-A3/ Read</b></i>
<i><b> T.V in Viet Nam</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
board
- T has the class discuss & correct the
answers on board
- T asks some questions to check ss'
comprehension
* Ss talk about T.V
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>1/ people 7/ they</i>
<i>2/ not 8/ today</i>
<i>3/ T.V 9/ have</i>
<i>4/ popular 10/ life</i>
<i>5/ evening 11/ know</i>
<i>6/ gather</i>
<b>4- </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i>: ( 2')
- <i>T reminds ss of the remember above</i>
<b>5- </b><i><b>Homework</b></i>: ( 3' )
<i>-Learn your lesson.</i>
<i> - Do A4/ 89 - workbook</i>
- <i>Prepare B1, B2- unit 14 (Listening & talking about T.V & T.V programs )</i>
Week 30
I<b>. . Objectives</b>:
Making inquiries about & express preferences ( cont )
+ Listening & talking about T.V & T.V programs (cont)
+ Listening for specific information
*Education: be polite
*Skills : listening, speaking, reading, writing
II<b>. Language contents</b>:
* Vocabulary: talk about T.V & T.V programs
* Grammar : like / prefer + to- inf
like / prefer + gerund
simple past & simple present
Singnature:
III<b>.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
IV <b>. Teaching aids:</b>
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the text about TV in Viet Nam (page 142)
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss' activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>( 5’)
- T: introduce the game
- Ss: play the game ( write some TV
programs which they know)
- two teams (A & B)
- T: check
-T: ask
+ Do you have a TV set at home?
+ Do you like watching TV?
+What programs do you like best?
-T: lead in to the new lesson
<b>B1/ </b>(20')
* T has ss look at the picture & ask:
<i>+ What kind of T.V program is the</i>
<i>character from ?</i>
<i>+ Do you like this program ?</i>
-T: This is Ba & Nga.
<i><b>They are talking some TV</b></i>
<i><b>programs which they like.</b></i>
<i><b>Before listening the dial, guess and</b></i>
<i><b>choose the programs they like.</b></i>
-Ss: choose
- T write
* Ss listen to the recordings twice
- Ss check their guessing
- T: explain some difficult words
and sentences.
- Ss: practice the dialogue
- Ss play the roles before the class &
corrections
_ T: <i><b>Ba wants to know what Nga</b></i>
<i><b>likes to watch on TV. What does he</b></i>
<i><b>ask?</b></i>
-T: elicit the structure
*<i><b> Warm up: </b></i>Play a game
cartoons
TV program
movies
sports
series
News
<i><b>B1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner</b></i>
<b>* Guessing</b>
<i><b>* Remember</b></i>
-T asks ss to practice the structures
-T: give some hints
* Ss find the answers in pairs
- public pairs & corrections
- writing the answers as homework
<b>B2/ </b>(10')
- T ask ss to read the list of
programs
<i>-T; ask </i>
<i><b>+ Which programs do you like</b></i>
<i><b>watching ?</b></i>
<i><b>+ Do you like watching ……?</b></i>
<i><b>+ What time do you know each of</b></i>
<i><b>the programs on ?</b></i>
<i>-</i> T ask ss to guess the times
* Ss listen to the tape & write the
answers
- 2nd listening & check the answers
individually
- cross check & public answers &
corrections
<i>-I like to watch programs about teenagers.</i>
<i>- I don't really like watching sports.</i>
<i> I prefer taking part in them.</i>
<i><b>* like /prefer + to-inf</b></i>
<i><b>* like / prefer + V-ing</b></i>
<i>* </i><b>Word cue drill</b>
<i>- cartoons</i>
<i>- News</i>
<i>- series</i>
<i>- children’s programs</i>
<i>- movies</i>
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>a/ No, she doesn't. Because there aren't many</i>
<i>good programs for teenagers</i>
<i>b/ Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and</i>
<i>movies.</i>
<i>c/ She likes to watch programs about teenagers</i>
<i>in other countries.</i>
<i>d/ Nga doesn't like music programs on T.V</i>
<i>because they don't play the kind of music she</i>
<i>likes</i>
<i>e/ This evening Nga is going to listen to the</i>
<i>radio and may be read a book</i>
<i><b>B2/ Listen. Write the times of the programs</b></i>
programs guessing listening
<i>a/ Children's </i>
<i>b/ The Early News </i>
<i>c/ Weather </i>
<i>Forecast </i>
<i>d/ The World </i>
<i>Today </i>
<i>e/ The movie "A </i>
<i>Fistful of dollars</i>
5.00
6.00
6.10
6.15
7.00
<i><b>4- Consolidation:</b></i> ( 2')
- <i>T reminds sts of the remember above</i>
<i>- Learn remember by heart</i>
<i> - Do B1, B2 – workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare B3, B4- unit 14 (writing & reviews vocabulary relating to T.V )</i>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b>:
T gives further practice in listening & reading to present new vocabulary. T gives
practice in writing & reviews vocabulary relating to T.V
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skills</b> : listening, speaking, reading & writing
<b>II</b>. .<b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about T.V & T.V programs
* <b>Grammar</b>: simple past & simple present
III <b>.Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
IV<b>. Teaching aids:</b>
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the dialogue (page 144) and answer these questions:
+Does Nga what a lot of TV? Why?/ Why not?
<i>No, she doesn't. Because there aren't many good programs for teenagers</i>
+What does Ba like to watch on TV?
<i>Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies.</i>
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss' activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<i> * Warm up: (5’)</i>
<i>- T: ask ss to ask and answer( pair</i>
<i>work)</i>
<i>- T: check some pairs</i>
<i>- T: lead in</i>
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
<i>- What kind of programs do you like ?</i>
<i>-I like to watch programs about teenagers</i>
<i><b>B3/ Listen and read. Then answer the</b></i>
<b>B3/ </b>( 20')
* T has ss look at the pictures &
asks if they can identify any of the
people in the pictures
* The pictures
<b>+</b><i><b> The Music band Moffats</b></i>
<i><b>+ The famous inspector Sherlock</b></i>
<i><b>Holmes</b></i>
<i><b>+ A scene from the " To the peak of</b></i>
<i><b>the Olympia "</b><b> T.V contest</b></i>
<i>- </i>T elicits the words: <i>pop music,</i>
<i>contests, imports</i>
<i>-</i> T introduces the content of the
lesson
- Ss listen to the tape, repeat the
lesson
- Ss read the tape to themselves to
find the answers in pairs
- public pairs & corrections
<b>* </b><i><b>What do you think is popular</b></i>
<i><b>with teenagers ?</b></i>
<b>B4/ </b>(15')
- T elicits the meanings of the words
- T sets the task: choose the words
from the box and complete the
passage on their own
- public passage & corrections
* T asks ss some questions about
Vietnam & local situations
<i><b>questions</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary.</i>
<i>- pop music</i>
<i>- band (n): ban nhạc</i>
<i>- perform (v): trình diễn</i>
<i>- contest (n): cuộc thi</i>
<i>- contestant (n): người dự thi</i>
<i>- import (n): sản phẩm nhập khẩu</i>
<i>- series (n): phim truyền hình nhiều tập</i>
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>a/ Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music</i>
<i>and see the shows of their favorite artists.</i>
<i>b/ In contest programs, the contestants are</i>
<i>students, workers or family members</i>
<i>c/ Imports usually include police and hospital</i>
<i>d/ I want to see...</i>
<i><b>B4/ Write. Complete the passage. Use the</b></i>
<i><b>words in the box</b></i>
<i>1/ around 6/ like</i>
<i>2/ watch 7/ station</i>
<i>3/ listen 8/ receive</i>
<i>4/ series 9/ cities</i>
<i>5/ show 10/ possible</i>
<i>4- Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the remember above</i>
<i>* Remember:</i>
<i>- What kinds of programs do you like ?</i>
<i> I like programs about...</i>
<i>- Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music.</i>
<i>- I don't really like ...</i>
<i>- I prefer...</i>
<i><b>5- Homework: ( 3' )</b></i>
<i>-Learn your lesson. </i>
<i> - Prepare 45-minute test</i>
I. <b>. Objectives</b>:
Review students of ordinary verbs: Like and Prefer; Past simple tense; adverbs of
manner; modal verbs; So, too, either and neither.
II. <b> Language contents</b>:
* <b>Grammar</b>: review
III <b>Techniques:</b>
eliciting, questions & answers
IV<b>. Teaching aids: </b>sub- boards
<b>V.Procedures: </b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
No checking
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
Grammar:
1. Like and Prefer
a. Like + to infinitive: thích
Nói về sự lựa chọn và thói quen
* Like + to infinitive: Dùng nói về sự lựa chọn.
Ex: I like to watch programs about teenagers in other countries.
* Like + to infinitive: Dùng nói về thói quen.
b. Like + V-ing: thích(=enjoy)
Ex: Do you like cooking?
c. Prefer: thích điều gì hơn
c.1. Prefer + to infinitive: dùng khi chúng ta muốn đề cập đến sự ưa thích điều gì đó hơn
khi rơi vào một tình huống đặc biệt
Ex: Can I give you a lift? – No, thanks. I prefer to walk.
Let’s go to the movie.- No, thanks. I prefer to watch TV.
c.2. Prefer + V-ing: dùng khi chúng ta muốn đề cập đến sự ưa thích điều gì đó hơn một
điều khác
Ex: I prefer going for a picnic
Do you like swimming?-Yes, but I prefer playing tennis.
d. Prefer sth TO sth: thích (cái gì) hơn (cái gì)
Ex: I prefer coffee to orange juice
Ex: I prefer playing volleyball to playing tennis.
<i><b>* Prefer + to infinitive + rather than + to infinitive</b></i>
f. Each other: với nhau, lẫn nhau > 2 người, vật
Ex: They often write to each other.
g. One another: với nhau, lẫn nhau > 3 người, vật trở lên
Ex: We should love and respect (tôn trọng) one another.
2. Past simple tense
<b>A> TO BE:</b> I/ He/ She/ It + was
You/ They/ We + were
(can/ could, may/ might, will/ would, shall/ should, must/ have to/ had to)
*Phủ định: + not sau ToBe (wasn’t/ weren’t)
*Nghi vấn:
Was/ Were + S …?
<b>B> ORDINARY VERBS: </b>
+ KĐ: S + V_ed/ V2 (irregular)
+ PĐ: S + DID NOT + V.Bare.
+ NV: DID + S + V.Bare?
+ WH: WH + DID + S + V.Bare?
*Regular verbs: Use 2nd<sub> column</sub>
<b>How to add -ED (regular verbs)</b>
We have many ways to add –ED to the regular verbs to make their past form.
+ Just add ED: play – played
watch - watched
listen – listened
+ Double the final consonant if there is a vowel before it:
stop - stopped
fit – fitted
<b> </b> * travel – travelled (<i>also</i> traveled)
+ Change Y to I if the verb ends with Y and there is a consonant before it:
fly – flied
study – studied
try – tried
<i> But enjoy - enjoyed </i>
+ Just add D: love – loved
like – liked
<b>How to pronounce -ED</b>
- Is pronounced /t/ when the verbs end with: sh, ch, k, p, ss, x, c, ge, ce, th (θ)
Ex: watched, stopped, looked, kissed,…
- Is pronounced / id/ when the verbs end with: t, d
Ex: wanted, needed, fitted,…
Ex: learned, studied, played,…
Adjectives + ly = Adverbs of manner
4. Modal verbs
Can, could, may, might, will, would, shall, should, must, have to,…
Structures: S + modal V + V(bare infinitive)
S + Modal V + not + V(bare infinitive)
Modal V + S + V(bare infinitive)? (Yes/No question )
5. So, Too, Neither and either
So + auxiliary verbs + S (affirmative)
Neither + auxiliary verbs + S (negative)
S + verbs/auxiliary , too
S + V(negative)/ Auxiliary(negative), either
<b>4- </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i>:
Ss review old strutures.
<i><b>5- Homework</b></i>
Prepare a 45 minute-test
Week 31
I. <b>. Objectives</b>:
Check students’ knowledge from Unit 12 to Unit 14
II. .<b> Language contents</b>:
Grammar and vocabulary (review)
III. <b>Question system</b>
<b>Matrix</b>
Singnature:
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences. </i>
1. What …… …….TV programs do you like ?
a. kinds b. kinds of c. of kind d. are
2. I like carrot and my father does, …
a. either b. neither c. too d. so
3. John prefers …………. table tennis to watching TV.
a. plays b. played c. playing d. play
4. Would you like ……….… dinner at my house tonight?
a. have b. to have c. having d. has
a. too many b. a lot c. too much d. little
6. In 1960s, most ………..…… in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set.
a. people b. family c. office d. school
7. Tam … to music at present.
a. listening b. is listening c. listen d. listened
8. Mr. Lam is a doctor, and …
a. so am I. b. I am either
c. neither am I. d. I do, too
9. My father drives his car very ……….………
a. careful b. carefully c. careless d. care
10. Minh must ……….… his homework before he plays soccer.
a. finished b. finish c. finishing d. finishes
<b>II. READING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>Read the following passage carefully.</i>
People of different ages have different hobbies for TV programs. Young children like
watching cartoons best, so there are many films of this kind on children’s corner. Teenagers
like sports shows, fashion shows, movies (often detective), music (often pop and rock) and
sometimes cartoons. But there are not many good programs for people of this age. Adults
Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vân dụng Tổng
TN TL TN TL TN TL
Listening <sub>2.5đ</sub>5c <sub>2.5đ</sub>5c
Reading <sub>0.5đ</sub>2c <sub>2.0 d</sub>4c <sub>2.5đ</sub>8c
Language
focus
6c
1.5đ
4
1.0
10c
2.5đ
prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests. Old people like watching and listening
to classical music best. They also watch movies, the news and other programs that suits them.
<i><b>A/. Tick True (T) or False (F) for the statements.</b></i><b>.</b>
1, … ….Young children like listening pop and rock best.
2, … …. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests
1. Who likes watching cartoon best?
2. What do adults prefer to watch?
3. What do old people like watching and listening?
4. What kinds of programs do you like?
<b>III. WRITING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
Write a 5-sentence passage about some kinds of programs on TV and talked about your
favorite programs.
<b>IV. LISTENING</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>Listen then write the times of the programs</i>
1. Early News .………
2. Children’s program ………
3. weather forecast ………..
4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” ……….
5. The World Today. ………
<b>ANSWER KEY:</b>
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>0.25 mark for each right answer</i>
1. b. kinds of
2. d. so
3. c. playing
<b>II. READING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
A/.<i>0.25 mark for each right answe</i>
1. F 2. T
<b>B/. </b><i>0.5 mark for each right answer</i>
1. Young children like watching cartoons best.
2. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests.
3. Old people like watching and listening to classical music best.
4. student’s answer
<b>III. WRITING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>0.5 mark for each right sentence.</i>
Suggested answer:
There are a lot of programs on TV: Children’s program, music, Weather forecast ….
In children’s program , there are cartoons. In music , we often see pop music, classical
music…..
<b>IV. LISTENING</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>Listen then write the times of the programs</i>
1. Early News 6.00
2. Children’s program 5.00
3. Weather forecast 6.10
4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” 7.00
5. The World Today. 6.15
<b>Lời trong băng:</b>
Ba: What is on TV at six tonight, Lan?
Lan: ;Let me see. It’s the early news. You want to watch it, don’t you?
Lan: It’s on at ten past six. But we should watch our children’s program. It starts at five.
Ba: OK. That sounds great.
<b>I. </b>Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to remember the knowledge from Unit 12o Unit
14
<b>II. Teaching aids</b>
Teaching plan, questions of the test.
<b>III. Procedures:</b>
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance.</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking)</b></i>
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T asks ss to do the test again
- T calls some ss to check the
answers.
- T corrects.
- T asks ss to read the text again.
- Students check the boxes.
- T corrects.
<b>I. LANGUAGE FOCUS</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>0.25 mark for each right answer</i>
1. b. kinds of
2. d. so
3. c. playing
4. b. to have
5. c. too much
6. a. people
7. b. is listening
<b>II. READING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
A/.<i>0.25 mark for each right answe</i>
1. F 2. T
<b>B/. </b><i>0.5 mark for each right answer</i>
- T asks ss to work in pairs to find
out the mistakes and give correct
ones.
- T calls ss to write the answers on
the board.
- T corrects.
- T asks ss to read the open text
again.
- T reads the text and asks ss to
complete.
- T calls some ss to give the answer.
- T corrects.
4. Young children like watching cartoons
best.
5. Adults prefer to watch the news,
reports, movies and contests.
6. Old people like watching and listening
to classical music best.
4. student’s answer
<b>III. WRITING </b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>0.5 mark for each right sentence.</i>
Suggested answer:
There are a lot of programs on TV:
Children’s program, music, Weather forecast
….
In children’s program , there are cartoons. In
music , we often see pop music, classical
music…..
<b>IV. LISTENING</b><i><b>(2.5marks)</b></i>
<i>Listen then write the times of the programs</i>
1. Early News 6.00
2. Children’s program 5.00
4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” 7.00
5. The World Today. 6.15
<b>Lời trong băng:</b>
Ba: What is on TV at six tonight, Lan?
Lan: ;Let me see. It’s the early news. You
want to watch it, don’t you?
program “ The World Today” at a quarter past
six.
Ba: And what about the weather forecast ?
What time is it on?
Lan: It’s on at ten past six. But we should
watch our children’s program. It starts at five.
Ba: OK. That sounds great.
4- <i>Consolidation</i><b>:</b>
<b>Ss correct if necessary.</b>
<i>5- Homework</i>
<b>Prepare Unit 15 – A1</b>
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b>:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to give and respond to advice, the topic of
video games and their effects
*<b>Education</b>: be polite
*<b>Skill</b> : listening
<b>II</b>.<b>Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: about video games
* <b>Grammar</b> : model verbs
<b>III.Techniques</b>:
eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.
<b>IV.Teaching aids</b>:
cassette, pictures & sub- boards.
<b>V</b>. <b>Procedures</b>:
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance.</b></i>
<i><b>2- Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking)</b></i>
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>(5’)
-T: elicit the new lesson
- Ss: say
- T: write
-T: lead in
<b>A1/ </b>
* (35')T has ss look at the picture &
asks them
<i>+ What can you see in the picture ?</i>
+<i>Are there any amusement centers town</i>
<i>/ village ?</i>
<i>+Do you often go there?</i>
<i>+ What do you do there ?</i>
<i><b></b></i> introduces amusement center and some
new words.
- Drill the pronunciation
<i>-</i>T introduces : Lan & Nam are talking
<i>*</i> (18')Sts listen to the dialogue once or
twice
- T: ask ss to notice two questions
- Sts practice the dialogue in pairs
- T elicits & explains the vocabulary,
calls ss' attention to the use of the
imperative structure " Don't..." for
giving advice & the respond " Don't..." (
What does Lan say to Nam ? )
- Sts find the answers & work in pairs
asking & answering the questions
- Checking the answers with the class
- T gives the correct answers
- Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs
- public pairs
<i><b>* Warm up:</b></i>
Entertainments
<i><b>A1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary.:</i>
<i>- amusement (n): sù giải trí, vui chơi</i>
<i>- addictive (a): ( có tính ) gây nghiện</i>
<i>- arcade (n): khu vui chơi, mua bán có mái</i>
<i>vòm</i>
<i>- video</i>
<i>* Questions: </i>
<i><b>- What does Lan advice Nam?</b></i>
<i><b>- How does he respond?</b></i>
<i>* Remember:</i>
<i><b>- Don't spend too much of your time in the</b></i>
<i><b>arcade.</b></i>
<i><b>- Don't worry, I won't.</b></i>
<i>* Answers:</i>
<i>a/ He's going to the amusement center.</i>
<i>b/ He's going to play video games.</i>
<i>c/ He goes to the amusement center about</i>
<i>once a week.</i>
<i>d/ No, he doesn't. He doesn't spend much</i>
<i>money.</i>
<i>e/ He usually stays for about an hour.</i>
<i>f/ Nam must be careful because video games</i>
<i>can be addictive.</i>
<i><b>4- Consolidation: ( 2')</b></i>
- ss: work in groups of 4 and list the bad effects caused by videogames.
- check
- <i>T reminds ss of the structures above</i>
<i><b>5- Homework: ( 3' )</b></i>
<i>-Learn your lesson.</i>
<i>- Do A1, A2 / 94, 95- workbook</i>
<i> - Prepare A2 ( about video games - cont )</i>
<b> </b>
<b>I</b>. <b>Objectives</b>:
<i>T introduces a compound adjective, and gives practice in reading for comprehension</i>
*<b>Education</b>:<i> be polite</i>
*<b>Skill</b> : <i>reading comprehension</i>
<b>II</b>. <b>Language contents</b>:
* <b>Vocabulary</b>: <i>words relating tovideo games</i>
* <b>Grammar</b> : <i> compound adjective</i>
III.<b>Techniques</b>:
<i>eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work.</i>
IV.<b>Teaching aids</b>:
<i>pictures & sub- boards.</i>
<b>V</b>. <b>Procedures</b>:
Singnature:
<i><b>1- Greeting and taking the attendance</b></i>
<i><b>2-Review of the previous lesson:</b></i>
Students read the dialogue and answer these questions:
-Where is Nam going? – to the amusement center
-What is he going to do? – to play video games
-How often does he go? – once a week
-Does he spend a lot of money? –no, he doesn’t
<i><b>3- New lesson</b></i>
<b>Teacher’s and Ss ' activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>* Warm up: </b>(5’)
- Ss: act out the dial A1
- T: ask: Do you like playing video
games?
+ How often do you play it?
- Can video games be addictive?
-SS: answer
- Introduce the new lesson.
<b>A2/(10’) </b>
- T: pre teach some new words
- Drill the pronunciation
- check
-T: raise a question “ What does the
doctor advise?”
-Ss: answer
-T: feed back and revise the modal
verbs
*(20') Sts listen to the passage twice
- cross check
- 2 ss read it aloud
- Sts read the passage in exercise A2 to
complete the sentences
- Sts check their answers in pairs
* (5') public pairs & corrections
- Writing the answers as homework
- You should take 10-minute- rest every
hour you play video games
<i><b>* Warm up: </b></i>
<i>Student’s answers</i>
<i><b>A2/ Listen and read:</b></i>
<i>* Vocabulary:</i>
<i>- inventor (n): người phát minh</i>
<i>- dizzy</i> ['dizi] <i> (a):hoa mắt</i>
<i>- social</i> ['sou∫l]<i> (a): giao tiếp</i>
<i>- socialize (v): giao tiếp</i>
<i>* All children should play outdoors.</i>
<i>- They mustn't forget to do other things</i>
<i>too.</i>
<i>- They shouldn't play video games for a</i>
<i>long time.</i>
<i>* Answers :</i>
<i>a - D, b - A , c - D, d – B</i>
<b>* Bad effects</b>:
- tired
-dizzy
-spend time on their own
<b>*Advise:</b>
-Take park in the activities with others.
-Play out doors.
-Be with people of their age.
<i><b>4- Consolidation:</b></i> ( 2')
- <i>T reminds ss of the vocabulary above</i>
<i><b>5-Homework:</b></i> ( 3' )